1 John 4:18 — Word Study

Greek	English	Parsing
φόβος	Fear	Noun, nominative, singular
οὐκ	no	Particle, negative
ἔστιν	there is	Verb, present, active
ἐν	in	Preposition
τῇ	<the>	Article, dative, singular
ἀγάπῃ,	love,	Noun, dative, singular
ἀλλ᾽	but	Conjunction
ἡ	<the>	Article, nominative, singular
τελεία	perfect	Adjective, nominative, singular
ἀγάπη	love	Noun, nominative, singular
ἔξω	out	Adverb
βάλλει	casts	Verb, present, active
τὸν	<the>	Article, accusative, singular
φόβον,	fear,	Noun, accusative, singular
ὅτι	because	Conjunction
ὁ	the	Article, nominative, singular
φόβος	fear	Noun, nominative, singular
κόλασιν	punishment	Noun, accusative, singular
ἔχει·	has;	Verb, present, active
ὁ	the [one]	Article, nominative, singular
δὲ	now	Conjunction
φοβούμενος	fearing	Verb, present, no voice stated
οὐ	not	Particle, negative
τετελείωται	has been perfected	Verb, perfect, passive
ἐν	in	Preposition
τῇ	<the>	Article, dative, singular
ἀγάπῃ.	love.	Noun, dative, singular

	Reference	Text (BSB)
1	Luke 1:74–75	deliverance from hostile hands, that we may serve Him without fear,
2	Romans 8:15	For you did not receive a spirit of slavery that returns you to fear, but you received the Spirit of sonship, by whom we cry, “Abba! Father!”
3	2 Timothy 1:7	For God has not given us a spirit of fear, but of power, love, and self-control.
4	Hebrews 12:28	Therefore, since we are receiving an unshakable kingdom, let us be filled with gratitude, and so worship God acceptably with reverence and awe.
5	Job 15:21	Sounds of terror fill his ears; in his prosperity the destroyer attacks him.

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

φόβοςphobos Fear G5401 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

47× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Fear or alarm that causes people to be terrified, as seen in Luke 1:12 and Acts 5:5. This term describes a feeling of dread or terror. It is the fear that people experience in difficult situations.

Amplified meaning

dread or terror

Tyndale gloss

fear

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φόβος (phobos) means fear, terror, or reverence. It is derived from the verb φέβομαι (to be put in fear) and encompasses a range of meanings from panic to awe. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Luke 1:12 and Romans 8:15. Some lexicons note a distinction between φόβος and other terms for fear, indicating its nuanced use.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — δειλία, φόβος, εὐλάβεια from a scan

Or these three words the first, δειλία, is used always in a bad sense ; the second, φόβος, is a middle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an evil, and lying indifferently between the two; the third, εὐλάβεια, is quite predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not altogether escaped being employed in an evil. Δειλία, equivalent to the Latin ‘ timor,’ and having θρασύτης (‘foolhardiness’) for its contrary extreme (Plato, Tim. 87 a), is our ‘cowardice.’ It occurs only once in the N. T., 2 Tim. i. 7; where Bengel says, exactly on what authority I know not, ‘ Est timor cujus cause potius in animo sunt quam foris;’ but δειλιάω at John xiv. 27; and δειλός at Matt. vil. 26; Mark iv. 40; Rev. xxi. 8: the δειλοί in this last passage being those who in time of persecution have under fear of suffering denied the faith; cf. Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. viii. 8. It is joined to…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φόβος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX chiefly for יִרְאָה, also for פַּחַד, אֵימָה, etc. ;]

in Hom., flight.

That which causes flight, fear, dread, terror: Lk 1:12, Ac 5:5, I Ti 5:20. I Jo 4:18, al.; cogn. acc., φοβεῖσθαι φ., Mk 4:41, Lk 2:9; c. gen. obj., Jo 7:13 19:33 20:19, He 2:5, I Pe 3:14 (but cf. ICC, in l.);ἀπὸ (τοῦ) φ., Mt 14:26, Lk 21:26; εἰς φ.,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φόβος, -ov, 6, (φέβομαι ; like φόρος, τρόμος, πόνος, fr. Φέρω, τρέμω, πένομαι), ἔτ. Hom. down, Sept. for 7X1, ἽΠ9,

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φόβος, igo 2h 25: 230} (5 ΒΙῸΣ: γειτνιώντων Θραικῶν φόβον, P Fay 2151 (A.D. 134) τῷ τοῦ προστίμου φόβῳ, ‘by the fear of incurring penalties,’ P Oxy XIV. 16681® (iii/A.D.) ὃ ἡγεμὼν ἀμνησίαν ἔπεμψεν ἐνθάδε, καὶ οὐκέτι φόβος οὐδὲ εἷς ever, “the praefect has sent an aninesty here, and there is no longer any fear at all’’ (Edd.), and BGU II. 5471 (Byz.) μέγας φόβος ἐπίκειται ἡμῖν. For the plur. as in 2 Cor 7°, see Sy// 168 (= 3 326)*1 (B.c. 307-6) kal φόβων κ[αὶ κινδύνων μεγάλων τοὺς] Ἕλληνας περιστάντων. The reverential fear towards God, which appears in such a passage as Ac 91, may be illustrated from P Lond 1914}? (A.D. 335°) φόβον θεοῦ ἔχοντες ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ : cf. 7. IV. 139318. In 2 Cor 5% Field (Votes, p. 183) prefers the rendering ‘‘terror,’’ as against RV…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φόβος (phobos) — fear.

φόβος, ὁ,

(φέβομαι) panic flight, the usual sense in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φόβονδ᾽ ἔχε μώνυχας ἵππους [Refs]; μή τι φόβονδ᾽ ἀγόρευε counsel not to flight,[Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. Φόβος personified, as son of Ares, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; worshipped at Selinus, [Refs]

II. panic fear, [στρατῷ] φ. ἐμβάλλειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; generally, fear, terror (distinguished from δέος (which see)), τορὸς ὀρθόθριξ φ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joined with δέος and δεῖμα, (see entry).; opposed to θάρρος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes in milder sense, doubt, scruple, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔχει πολλὴν ὑποψίαν καὶ φ. ὡς.. [Refs]: also, awe, reverence, for a ruler or divine being, τοῦ ἡγεμόνος [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; θεοῦ [LXX+4th c.AD+].—Construction, a. with genitive object, fear or dread of.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. περὶ τοῦ καρποῦ fear for or…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φόβος

phobos

from a primary phebomai (to be put in fear); alarm or fright:--be

afraid, + exceedingly, fear, terror.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φόβος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

fear, terror, reverence

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φόβος phobos 47x

fear, terror, affright, Mt. 14:26; Lk. 1:12; astonishment, amazement, Mt. 28:8; Mk. 4:41; trembling concern, 1 Cor. 2:3; 2 Cor. 7:15; meton. a terror, an object or cause of terror, Rom. 13:5; reverential fear, awe, Acts 9:31; Rom. 3:18; respect, deference, Rom. 13:7; 1 Pet. 2:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φόβος φόβος, ὁ, φέβομαι flight, Lat. fuga, the only sense in Hom.; φόβονδε ῀ φύγαδε, μή τι φόβονδ᾽ ἀγόρευε counsel not to flight, Il., etc.:— Φόβος is personified as son of Ares, id. Il., Hes.

panic fear, such as causes flight, στρατῷ φ. ἐμβάλλειν Hdt.:—then generally, fear, terror, properly of the outward show of fear, and so distinguished from δέος (the sensation of fear), Aesch., etc.: the Object of fear is in gen., fear of another, id. Aesch., etc.; so φ. ἀπό τινος Xen.; ἔκ τινος Aesch.; πρός τινος Soph.;—but, φ. περί or ὑπέρ τινος fear for or concerning . . , Thuc.:—with Verbs, ποιεῖν or παρέχειν τινί Xen.; φόβον ἐμβάλλειν, ἐντιθέναι τινί to strike terror into one, Lat. metum incutere alicui, Xen., etc.;—of the person who feels fear, φόβον λαμβάνειν Eur.; φόβος ἔχει με Aesch.; f. e)mpi/ptei moi Xen.; διὰ φόβου ἔρχομαι…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fer (yir'ah, yare'; phobos, phobeo):

Terms, etc.:

"Fear" is the translation of many words in the Old Testament; the chief are: yir'ah, "fear," "terror," "reverence," "awe," most often "the fear of God," "fear of Yahweh" (Ge 20:11; 2Ch 19:9, etc.); also of "fear" generally (Job 22:4; Isa 7:25; Eze 30:13, etc.); yare', "to be afraid," "to fear," "to reverence" (Ge 15:1; Le 19:3,14; De 6:2, etc.); pachadh, "fear," "terror," "dread" (

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See COWARDICE

→ Also see FEAR OF GOD, below

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

83%fear

fear83% · 38×respect7% · 3×awe2% · 1×terror2% · 1×fears2% · 1×reverence2% · 1×threats2% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial51%subject26%object17%predicate4%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 47 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

διάἀπόδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

καίand, even, also,ἁγιωσύνηa holy or sanctiἀλλήλων

μετά

μνημεῖονa tomb, sepulcheὡςas, like as, howκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁράωI see, look uponπραΰτηςmildness, gentleαὐτός

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

καίand, even, also,

φόβοςFear47×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸουδαῖοςJewishκύριοςlord, Lord, mastὁArticle the

καίand, even, also, nam

τρόμοςa tremblingχαράjoy, gladnessπροσδοκίαexpectation, wai

μέγας

ἐπίκαίand, even, also,συνέχωI press together

αὐτός

σείωI shakeμήNeg

θεόςGod, a god

ἀπέναντιover against, op

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφόβος · 47× in the New Testament

Luke 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Acts Romans 1 John John Matthew Revelation Ephesians 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μέγας×διά×μετά×φόβοςfear, terror, reverence×τρόμοςa trembling×φοβέωI fear, am terrified×ἐπιπίπτωI fall upon, press upon×ἸουδαῖοςJewish×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

פַּ֫חַדdread22%H6343 · 23 verses יִרְאָהfear21%H3374 · 22 verses

Counted over the 101 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 79c. AD 40

τουτὶ δὲ συμβήσεται, ἐὰν μήτε αἱ ἄλογοι ἡδοναὶ ψυχῆς δυναστεύσωσι γαστριμαργίαν καὶ λαγνείαν ἐπιτειχίσασαι μήτε αἱ δόξης ἢ χρημάτων ἢ ἀρχῆς ἐπιθυμίαι τὸ τοῦ βίου κράτος ἀνάψωνται μήτε στείλωσι καὶ κάμψωσι διάνοιαν αἱ λῦπαι μήθ’ ὁ κακὸς σύμβουλος…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Worp 16AD 11

σιος Δωριεὺς Φλελεμούθι πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ ὑγιαίνειν. μὴ φοβοῦ περὶ τῶν σκευῶν ὧν ἔχεις ἀλλὰ ἀσφάλισαι, ἂν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ μεταλλάρχης ἔλθῃ ἐρωτῶν‧

P.Fay. 21Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 134

ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται τῷ τοῦ προστίμου φόβῳ, δυνήσονται μαρτυρίαν vestiges ποιήσασθαι περὶ τῶν μὴ προσιεμένων οἱ μὴ διδόντες ὅπως τῆς ἀπειθίας

BGU 2 372ArsinoitesAD 154

τινὰς ἐκφυγόντας διὰ τὴν τότε περὶ αὐτοὺς ἀσθένειαν ἐν ἀλλοδαπῇ ἔτι καὶ νῦν διατρίβειν φόβῳ τῶν γενομένων παραυτίκα προγραφῶν. προτρέπομαι οὖν πάντας ἐπανελθεῖν ἐπὶ τὰ ἴδια καὶ τὸν μὲν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

οὐκou no G3756 Particle · negative ¶

1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.

Amplified meaning

absence of, complete lack of

Tyndale gloss

no

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as mē), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

no.

See NO-AMON.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

No

Or No-A’mon, the home of Amon, the name of Thebes, the ancient capital of what is called the Middle Empire, in Upper or Southern Egypt. “The multitude of No” (Jer. 46:25) is more correctly rendered, as in the Revised Version, “Amon of No”, i.e., No, where Jupiter Amon had his temple. In Ezek. 30:14, 16 it is simply called “No;” but in ver. 15 the name has the Hebrew Hamon prefixed to it, “Hamon No.” This prefix is probably the name simply of the god usually styled Amon or Ammon. In Nah. 3:8 the “populous No” of the Authorized Version is in the Revised Version correctly rendered “No-Amon.”

Smith's Bible Dictionary

[NO-AMON]

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

stirring up; forbidding

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

82%not

not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός

ὅς

ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe

ὅτιthat, since, because

σύαὐτόςἐγώ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς

οὐno1622×

what comes after →

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐκὁArticle theἐγώ

μήNeg

παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe

οἶδαI know, remember

ὅτιthat, since, becὁArticle theτίςIrg

γάρfor

εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deὁArticle the

δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab

ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament

John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶδαI know, remember×δύναμαιI am powerful, am able×οὐδέNeg×μόνοςalone, but, only×χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted, lawful, possible×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 17137 BC

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἔστινeimi there is G1510 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular ¶

2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.

Tyndale gloss

to be

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

26%is

is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς

οὗτος

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god

ἐγώ

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά

σύ

ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

εἰμίthere is2457×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegγάρfor

ἐν

ὁArticle theσύαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t

ἐγώ

εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, deserving×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἐνen in G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνin2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

τῇho <the> G3588 Article · dative · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἀγάπῃ,agapē love, G26 Noun · dative · singular · feminine ¶

116× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Unconditional love or affection, like the love God shows to humanity in John 3:16. It's also used to describe love between people, like in John 13:35.

Amplified meaning

unconditional, selfless affection

Tyndale gloss

love

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀγάπη (i.e., *agape*) means love, particularly the spiritual love between God and humanity, as well as among individuals. It is often associated with goodwill and esteem, distinguishing it from other forms of love like friendship or romantic love. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in the context of Christian teachings on love, such as in John 13:35 and Romans 5:8. The plural form refers to communal love feasts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† ἀγάπη, -ης, ἡ

[in LXX for אַהֲבָה, which is also rendered by ἀγάπησις and φιλία;]

love, goodwill, esteem. Outside of bibl. and eccl. books, there is no clear instance (with Deiss., LAE, 18:4, 70:2, cf. the same writer in Constr. Quar., ii, 4; and with MM, VGT, s.v., cf. Dr. Moulton in Exp. Times, xxvi, 3, 139). In NT, like ἀγαπάω, -ῶ,

Of men's love:

to one another, Jo 13:35;

to God, I Jo 2:5.

Of divine love;

God's love: to men, Ro 5:8; to Christ, Jo 17:26;

Christ's love to men: Ro 8:35.

In pl., love feasts: Ju 12 (DB, iii, 157).

SYN.: φιλία. ἀ., signifying properly (v.s. ἀγαπάω) love which chooses its object, is taken over from LXX, where its connotation is more general, into NT, and there used exclusively to express that spiritual bond of love…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀγάπη, -ἧς, ἡ, ἃ purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyttenbach, following Reiske’s conjecture, long ago restored ἀγαπήσων in place of ἀγάπης, ὧν in Plut. sympos. quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof. auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used ἀγάπησις. “The Sept. use ἀγάπη for 138, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8; vii. 6; viii. 4,6, 7; [It is noticeable that the word first makes its appearance as a current term in the Song of Sol.;—certainly no undesigned evidence respecting the idea which the Alex. translators had of the love in this Song” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1,6; [2 S. xiii. 15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas.; it occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and Rey., but frequently in the…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀγαπη use in connexion with Ptolemy on the Rosetta stone, OG/S got (B.C. 196) ἠγαπημένου ὑπὸ τοῦ POa. Cf. a Munich papyrus in Chrest. I. 1091" (end of iii/B.c.), where Wilcken restores [Πτολεμαῖ]ος αἰωνόβιος ἠγα[πημένος ὑπὸ τῆς Ισιδος]. It may be noted that in Mk 10% Field (Λίοζες, Pp. 34) suggests the translation ‘‘caressed” for ἠγάπησεν, comparing Plut. Peric/. 1: ξένους τινὰς ἐν ἹΡώμῃ πλουσίους, κυνῶν τέκνα καὶ πιθήκων ἐν τοῖς κόλποις περιφέροντας καὶ ἀγαπῶντας (fondling) ἰδὼν ὁ Καῖσαρ. .. ἠρώτησεν εἰ παιδία παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς οὐ τίκτουσιν αἱ γυναῖκες. Β. L. Gildersleeve (Justin Martyr, p. 135) suggests that ‘the larger use of [ἀγαπᾶν] in Christian writers is perhaps due to an avoidance of φιλεῖν in the sense of ‘kissing.”” He says Xenophon made the two words absolute synonyms, comparing MZemorahsilia ii. 7. 9 with 12; while he deprecates refinements in Jn 2111", since ‘the Evangelist…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀγάπη (agapē) — love.

ἀγάπ-η, ἡ,

love, [LXX+2nd c.BC+] O; of the love of husband and wife, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. especially love of God for man and of man for God, [LXX+1st c.AD+]:—also brotherly love, charity, [NT]

II. in plural, love-feast, [NT]

III. alms, charity, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

IV. ἀγάπη θεῶν, title of Isis, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀγάπη

agape

from 25; love, i.e. affection or benevolence; specially (plural) a

love-feast:--(feast of) charity(-ably), dear, love.

see GREEK for 25

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀγάπη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

love

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγάπη agapē 116x

love, generosity, kindly concern, devotedness; pl. love-feasts, Jude 12

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀγάπη Deriv. uncertain. love: esp. brotherly love, charity; the love of God for man and of man for God, NTest.

in pl. a love-feast, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

luv ('ahebh, 'ahabhah, noun; phileo, agapao, verb; agape, noun): Love to both God and man is fundamental to true religion, whether as expressed in the Old Testament or the New Testament. Jesus Himself declared that all the law and the prophets hang upon love (Mt 22:40; Mr 12:28-34). Paul, in his matchless ode on love (1Co 13), makes it the greatest of the graces of the Christian life--greater than speaking with tongues, or the gift of prophecy, or the possession of a faith of superior excellence; for without love all these gifts and graces, desirable and useful as they are in themselves, are as nothing, certainly of no permanent value in the sight of God. Not that either Jesus or Paul underestimates the faith from which all the graces proceed, for this grace is recognized as…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Love

This word seems to require explanation only in the case of its use by our Lord in his interview with “Simon, the son of Jonas,” after his resurrection (John 21:16, 17). When our Lord says, “Lovest thou me?” he uses the Greek word agapas; and when Simon answers, he uses the Greek word philo, i.e., “I love.” This is the usage in the first and second questions put by our Lord; but in the third our Lord uses Simon’s word. The distinction between these two Greek words is thus fitly described by Trench:, ”Agapan has more of judgment and deliberate choice; philein has more of attachment and peculiar personal affection. Thus the ‘Lovest thou’ (Gr. agapas) on the lips of the Lord seems to Peter at this moment too cold a word, as though his Lord were keeping him at a distance, or at least not inviting him to draw near, as in the…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

GOD IS LOVE; AND HE THAT DWELLETH IN LOVE DWELLETH IN GOD, AND GOD IN HIM, 1Jo 4:16. Love is a chief attribute of Jehovah, the length and breadth and height and depth of which are beyond comprehension, for they are infinite, Eph 3:18,19. Between the three Persons of the Godhead, love is unutterable full, perfect, and blissful; towards holy angels and Christians, God’s love is an infinite fatherly complacency and affection; towards sinners, it is immeasurable compassion. It is shown in all his works and ways, and dictated his holy law, but is most signally displayed in the gospel, Joh 3:16. "Herein is love."

Holy love in man would make the whole heart and soul supremely delight in and obey God, and cordially and practically love all beings according to their character-the good…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ OF CHILDREN FOR PARENTS

See CHILDREN

→ OF GOD, LOVE OF

→ OF MAN FOR GOD Ex 20:6; De 5:10; 6:5; 7:9; 10:12; 11:1,13,22; 13:3; 30:6,16,20; Jos 22:5; 23:11; Ps 18:1; 31:23; 37:4; 45:10,11; 63:5,6; 69:35,36; 73:25,26; 91:14; 97:10; 116:1; 145:20; Pr 8:17; 23:26; Isa 56:6,7; Jer 2:2,3; Mt 22:37,38; Mr 12:29,30,32,33; Lu 11:42;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

98%love

love98% · 112×other renderings2% · 2×

114 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial35%subject29%object29%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 116 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἐνὅτιthat, since, bec

ἐν

σύἑαυτοῦἤDisj

καίand, even, also, nam

πίστιςfaith, belief, tἀδελφόςa brotherδύναμιςmight, power, ma

ἀγάπηlove,116×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godΧριστόςanointed, the Meἐν

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of εἰς

σύ

καίand, even, also,ἔτιstill, yet, evenὅτιthat, since, bec

ὅς

ἔχωI have, hold, poἀγαπάωI loveεἰμίI am, exist

δέbut, on the other ha

μήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀγάπη · 116× in the New Testament

1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians Romans John 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy Colossians 2 Timothy Philippians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×ἀλλήλων×μένωI remain, abide×εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind×ὑπομονήendurance, steadfastness×τελειόωI complete, accomplish, make perfect×περιπατέωI walk, conduct my life×ζηλόωI am jealous, eager for×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Polycarp

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Unchangeableness of God 69c. AD 40

παρό μοι δοκεῖ τοῖς προειρημένοις δυσὶ κεφαλαίοις, τῷ τε „ὡς ἄνθρωπος“ καὶ τῷ „οὐχ ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὁ θεὸς“ ἕτερα δύο συνυφῆναι ἀκόλουθα καὶ συγγενῆ, φόβον τε καὶ ἀγάπην·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 21.7c. AD 96

τὸ ἀξιαγάπητον τῆς ἁγνείας ἦθος ἐνδειξάσθωσαν, τὸ ἀκέραιον τῆς πραΰτητος αὐτῶν βούλημα ἀποδειξάτωσαν, τὸ ἐπιεικὲς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτῶν διὰ τῆς σιγῆς φανερὸν ποιησάτωσαν, τὴν ἀγάπην αὐτῶν μὴ κατὰ προσκλίσεις, ἀλλὰ πᾶσιν τοῖς φοβουμένοις τὸν θεὸν ὁσίως…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

4th c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Got. 11AD 201–AD 325

πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν κυρίῳ βοηθεῖν, καὶ ταύταις ἀγομέναις πρὸς τὸν ἐπίτροπον ἐπιδώσεις τὴν ἀγάπην σου, διʼ ὧν ἐὰν παράσχῃ αὐταῖς. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι ἐν κυρίῳ.

Vigiliae Christianae 79 (2025), p. 201-210AD 301–AD 350

ἐν Διὸς Πόλει, ἵνα οὖν μαρτυρήσῃ ἡμῖν τὰ τῆς ἐν θεῷ σου ἀγάπης. προσαγόρευε ἐν κυρίῳ τὴν ποθεινοτάτην ἡμῶν θυγατέρα Μαρκιανὴν μετὰ καὶ ὅλων τῶν ἐν τῷ

P.Lond. 6 1914Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 335

ὅτι ἡμάρτησα καὶ ἐπαρῳνήθην ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ὅτι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς ὕβρισα. ἐποίησεν δὲ καὶ ἀγάπην ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ᾑμέρᾳ Ἑλλην ὢν διὰ τὸ ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐποίησεν.

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἀλλ᾽alla but G235 Conjunction ¶

638× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

But is a strong opposing word, used in Matthew 5:15 and John 7:16. It shows contrast or surprise, like in the phrase 'but God' in Romans 3:31.

Tyndale gloss

but

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀλλά (alla) is an adversative particle, meaning 'but' or 'otherwise.' It is derived from the neuter plural of ἄλλος and is used to introduce opposition or contrast in sentences. In the New Testament, it often appears in contexts that involve negation or exceptions, such as in Matthew 5:15 and John 16:2. The lexicons note its stronger adversative force compared to δέ.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀλλά (ἀλλ’ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146),

adversative particle,

stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Ro 3:31);

opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mt 5:15, 17 Mk 5:39, Jo 7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mk 9:37, Mt 10:20, Jo 12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mt 11:7-9…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀλλά, an adversative particle, derived from ἄλλα, neut. of the adj. ἄλλος, which was originally pronounced ἀλλός (cf. Klotz ad Dévar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things se. than those just mentioned. It differs from δέ, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [ef. W. 441 sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to concessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (ἀλλ᾽ ὁ θεός etc.), ete. 2. an objection: Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; xe 29: 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. with καί added, Lk. xii. 7…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀλλά. The closeness οἱ ἀλλά to πλήν appears in more uses than one. Armitage Robinson, Zp/estans, p. 205, has a note on a quasi-resumpltive use of ἀλλά in Eph 524 which is closely paralleled by that of πλήν in ver. 33. Then there are instances of ἀλλά = ‘‘except.” ‘This is clear where we have ἀλλ᾽ ἤ (as in 2 Cor 13%): thus P Petr 11. 9 (3)® (B.c. 24139) ὥστε μηθένα εἶναι ἐνταῦθα ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἡμᾶς, ‘ There is no one left here except ourselves” (Ed.), 2d. 46 (α)" (B.C. 209) καὶ μὴ ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς ἄλλο μηδὲν add’ ἢ τὴν mpoyeypap[μέν]ην ἐγγύην, “has not been pledged for any other purpose than the aforesaid security” (1α.), P Lond 89738 (a.p. 84) (=TIII. p. 207) ὃ μέντοιγε οὐ θέλων. ἀλλὰ ἢ ἀνάγκηι. In P Tebt I. το 419 (B.c. 92) μὴ ἐξέστω Φιλίσκωι γυναῖκα ἄλλην. μ γυ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀλλά (alla) — but.

ἀλλά,

conjunction, originally neuter plural of ἄλλος, otheruise: used adversatively to limit or oppose words, sentences, or clauses, stronger than δέ:

I. in simple oppositions, but,

I.1. after negative clauses, οὐ κακός, ἀλλ᾽ ἀγαθός[Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.1. b after a simple negative, ἦ παραφρονεῖ; οὔκ, ἀλλ᾽ ὕπνος μ᾽ ἔχει[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.1. c frequently after οὐ μόνον, μὴ μόνον, with or without καί, οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀ. πολλάκις[Refs 5th c.BC+], either, not only.. but.., μὴ ὅτι ἰδιώτην τινά, ἀλλὰ τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; or, not only not.. but.., οὐχ ὅπως κωλυταὶ.. γενήσεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ.. περιόψεσθε[Refs 5th c.BC+]; the negative form is ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, μὴ ὅτι ὑπὲρ ἄλλου, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ὑπὲρ ἐμαυτοῦ δίκην εἴρηκα[Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀλλά

alla

neuter plural of 243; properly, other things, i.e. (adverbially)

contrariwise (in many relations):--and, but (even), howbeit, indeed,

nay, nevertheless, no, notwithstanding, save, therefore, yea, yet.

see GREEK for 243

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀλλά

Cj.

but, except

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀλλά alla 638x

but; however; but still more; ἀλλάγε, at all events; ἀλλή, unless, except. Ἀλλά also serves to introduce a sentence with keenness and emphasis, Jn. 16:2; Rom. 6:5; 7:7; Phil. 3:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀλλά Conjunct., properly neut. pl. of ἄλλος (with changed accent) otherwise, but, stronger than δέ:

to oppose single clauses, but, Lat. autem, the preceding clause being negat., οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις Plat.; so, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅτι, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅπως, are followed by ἀλλά or ἀλλά καὶ . . . , not only . . . , but . . .

after a negative ἀλλά sometimes = ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, except, but, ἔπαισεν οὔτις ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ Soph.

to oppose whole sentences, but, yet, Lat. at:— used by Hom., with imperat. or subj., to remonstrate, encourage, persuade, like Lat. tandem, ἀλλ᾽ ἴθι, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε, ἀλλὰ ἴωμεν, Hom.

joined with other Particles, ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα, or, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but then, however, Hdt., etc.

ἀλλὰ γάρ, Lat. enimvero, but really, certainly, attic

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

92%but

but92% · 591×instead2% · 15×other renderings4% · 25×other renderings2% · 12×

643 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial10%object6%predicate3%subject2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 638 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

οἶδαI know, rememberκατεργάζομαιI work out, prodἐπιγινώσκωI come to know,

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγράφωI writeἐν

ἐγώ

ἀπόκρατέωI lay hold of, oθέλημαwill, wish, desi

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐNegοὐδείςno one, none, noΜωϋσῆςMoses

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theἄνομοςlawless, sinful,

ἀλλάbut638×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὁArticle theπέμπωI sendθεόςGod, a god

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ἐν

οὐNeg

πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ἐν

πᾶςall, the whole, ὁArticle theδύναμιςmight, power, ma

ἵναin order that, so th

φανερόωI make clear, viπληρόωI fill, fulfill,σῴζωI save, heal

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀλλά · 638× in the New Testament

John 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Mark Matthew Luke Acts Galatians 1 Peter Hebrews Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μόνοςalone, but, only×οὐχίIrg×ἐμαυτοῦ×θέλημαwill, wish, desire×οὐκέτιNeg×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτους ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος, ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτει ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἡho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

τελείαteleios perfect G5046 Adjective · nominative · singular · feminine ¶

19× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word describes something or someone as complete or mature, like a fully grown person. In Philippians 3:15, it refers to being spiritually mature, and in Hebrews 5:14, it describes those who are mature in their faith.

Amplified meaning

complete, mature

Tyndale gloss

perfect

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τέλειος (teleios) means complete or perfect, derived from the root for 'end' or 'completion.' It encompasses maturity in physical, ethical, and moral senses, often contrasting with immaturity. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts discussing spiritual maturity and completeness, such as in James 1:4 and Matthew 5:48. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ὁλόκληρος, τέλειος from a scan

“‘OdoxAnpos and τέλειος occur together, though their order is reversed, at'Jam. i. 4,“ perfect and entire” (cf. Philo, De Sac. Ab. et Cain. 33: Zumdea καὶ ὁλόκληρα Kal τέλεια : Dio Chrysostom, Orat. 12, p. 203); ὁλόκληρος only once besides in the N. T. (1 Thess. v. 23); ὁλοκληρία also, but in a physical not an ethical sense, once (Acts iii. 16; cf. Isai. i. 6). ‘OddxAnpos signifies first, as its etymology declares, that which retains all which was allotted to it at the first (Ezek. xv. 5), being thus whole and entire in all its parts (ὁλόκληρος καὶ παντελής, Philo, De Merc. Meret. 1) ; with nothing necessary for its completeness wanting. Thus Darius would have been well pleased not to have taken Babylon if only Zopyrus, who had maimed himself to carry out the stratagem by which it fell, were ὁλόκληρος still (Plutarch, Reg. et Imper. Apoph.). Again, unhewn §xxu. SYNONYMS OF THE NEW…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέλειος, -α, -ον

(< τέλος),

[in LXX chiefly for שָׁלֵם, תָּמִים and cogn. forms ;]

having reached its end, finished, mature, complete, perfect;

of persons, primarily of physical development,

full-grown, mature: He 5:14; ethically: Phl 3:15; opp. to νήπιος (-άζειν), I Co 2:6 14:20, Eph 4:13; τ. καὶ πεπληροφορημένοι, Col 4:12; τ. ἐν Χριστῷ, Col 1:28;

complete, perfect (expressing the simple idea of complete goodness, without reference either to maturity or to the philosophical idea of a τέλος; v. Hort on Ja 1:4):

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέλειος, -a, -ov, (τέλος), in classic Grk. sometimes also τος, τον, (cf. W. § 11, 1), fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for Dow, DNA, etc.; prop. brought to its end, finished; wanting nothing necessary to completeness ; perfect: ἔργον, Jas.i.4; ἡ ἀγάπη, 1 In. iv. 18; ὁ νόμος, Jas. i. 25; [δώρημα, Jas. i. 17]; τελειοτέρα σκηνή, a more perfect (excellent) tabernacle, Heb. ix. 11; τὸ τέλειον, substantively, that which is perfect: consummate human integrity and virtue, Ro. xii. 2 [4]. take it here as an adj. belonging to θέλημα) ; the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Co. xiii. 10; of men, full-grown, adult; of full age, mature, (Aeschyl. Ag. 1504; Plat. lege. 11 p.929¢.): Heb. v.14; τέλ. ἀνήρ (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4sq.; 8, 7,6; Philo de cherub. § 32; opp. to παιδίον νήπιον, Polyb. 5, 29,2; for other exx. fr. other auth. see Bleek, Brief a. d.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τέλειος, lit. ‘having reached its end (τέλος). Hence (1) “ fullgrown,” ‘‘ mature,” (a) of fersons—BGU IV. 1100! (marriage-contract—time of Augustus) τ]έλιον οὖσαζν» πρὸς βίου κοινωνίαν [ἀν]δρί, P Oxy III. 485° (a.p. 178) κληρονόμοις [αἸὐ τῆ]ς TeAclfo]ys, “to her heirs being of age,” 26. II. 237 Vi 15 (a.p. 186) περὶ τοῦ τὰς ἤδη τελείας γυναῖκας γενομένας ἑαυτῶν εἶναι κυρίας, εἴτε βούλονται παρὰ τοῖς ἀνδράσιν μένειν εἴτε μή, ““ 411 proving that women who have attained maturity are mistresses of their persons, and can remain with their husbands or not as they choose” (Edd.), (4) of anxzmals—BGU IV. 1067!2 (A.D. 101-102) ἀλεκτόρων τελείων τεσσάρων, ‘four full-grown cocks,” P Grenf II. 4613 (a.p. 137) πεπρακέναι αὐτῷ ὄνο(ν) θήτελίαν (see note). (2) ‘‘in good working order or condition” —P Oxy II. 2784 (a.p. 17) μύλο]ν ἕν[α] τ[έλει[ο]ν Θηβαεικόν, ‘gqne perfect Theban mill” (Edd.), i. IX.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τέλειος (teleios) — perfect.

τέλειος

and τέλεος, α, ον, in Trag., Attic dialect, and Doric dialectalso ος, ον, [Refs 5th c.BC+] is alone used by [Refs 8th c.BC+], neither form in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τέλεος is alone used by [Refs 5th c.BC+] are recommended by [Refs 6th c.AD+]; τέλειος first in [Refs 2nd c.BC+], frequently in Papyri [Refs 3rd c.BC+] adverb is sometimes τέλεον[Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc., τέλειον [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: the form τέλεως, accusative τέλεων, with plural τέλεῳ, is found in [Refs 4th c.BC+]: the form τέληον in [Refs]: (τέλος):—perfect, of victims, entire, without spot or blemish, ἀρνῶν αἰγῶν τε τελείων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; βοτὸν τ. [Refs]; τὸνς ϝεξήκοντα τελέονς ὄϝινς (accusative plural) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of sacrifices, ἱερὰ τ. perfect, of full tale or number, or performed with all rites, [Refs 8th c.BC+] is probably the surest bird of augury (compare…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέλειος

teleios

from 5056; complete (in various applications of labor, growth, mental

and moral character, etc.); neuter (as noun, with 3588)

completeness:--of full age, man, perfect.

see GREEK for 5056

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέλειος, α, ον

Adj

perfect, full-grown

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τέλειος teleios 19x

brought to completion; fully accomplished, fully developed, Jas. 1:4a; fully realized, thorough, 1 Jn. 4:18; complete, entire, as opposed to what is partial and limited, 1 Cor. 13:10; full grown of ripe age, 1 Cor. 14:20; Eph. 4:13; Heb. 5:14; fully accomplished in Christian enlightenment, 1 Cor. 2:6; Phil. 3:15; Col. 1:28; perfect in some point of character, without shortcoming in…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τέλειος τέλος having reached its end, finished, complete, Il., etc.: of victims, perfect, without spot or blemish, id. Il.; τὰ τέλεα τῶν προβάτων Hdt.; of sacrifices, ἱερὰ τέλεια of full tale or number, or performed with all rites, Thuc.; so, αἰετὸς τελειότατος πετεηνῶν is prob. the surest bird of augury, Il.

of animals, fullgrown, Xen., etc.

of persons, absolute, complete, accomplished, perfect in his or its kind, Plat., etc.: —so of things, φάρμακον τελεώτατον id. Plat.; τ. ἀρετή, φιλία, etc., Arist.

of prayers, vows, etc., fulfilled, accomplished, Pind., Aesch.; ὄψις οὐ τελέη a vision which imported nothing, Hdt.; τ. ψῆφος a fixed resolve, Soph.

in Arithm., those numbers are τέλειοι, which are equal to the sum of their divisors, as 6 = 3 + 2 + 1, Plat.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adj-NSF — Adjective · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

63%perfect

perfect63% · 12×mature21% · 4×full grown5% · 1×complete5% · 1×more perfect5% · 1×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

predicate42%adverbial26%subject21%second object5%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνἔρχομαιI come, goἀλλάbut, except

καίand, even, also, nam

εὐάρεστοςacceptable, wellμέγας

σύ

οὖνtherefore, then

οὐράνιοςheavenly

ὁArticle the

θέλωI will, wish, desire

εἰCond

τέλειοςperfect19×

what comes after →

εἰμίI am, exist

ὑπάγωI go away, depar

ὁArticle the

ἐκὁArticle the

καίand, even, also, nam

πληροφορέωI carry out fullὁλόκληροςcomplete in ever

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

ὁArticle the

σοφίαwisdom

δέbut, on the othe

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέλειος · 19× in the New Testament

James 1 Corinthians Matthew Colossians Hebrews 1 John Ephesians Philippians Romans

Across the New Testament9 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἵναin order that, so that×οὖνtherefore, then×ἀνήρa male human being, a man×ἀγάπηlove×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 13c. AD 40

τῶν τε γὰρ ἀπὸ μονάδος πρῶτος τέλειός ἐστιν ἰσούμενος τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μέρεσι καὶ συμπληρούμενος ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἡμίσους μὲν τριάδος, τρίτου δὲ δυάδος, ἕκτου δὲ μονάδος, καὶ ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν ἄρρην τε καὶ θῆλυς εἶναι πέφυκε κἀκ τῆς ἑκατέρου δυνάμεως ἥρμοσται·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.230c. AD 75–95

οἱ δὲ ἀδύνατοι πορίζειν τὰ τέλεια θύματα περιστερὰς ἢ τρυγόνας δύο, ὧν τὸ μὲν ὁλοκαυτεῖται τῷ θεῷ, τὸ δὲ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν εἰς βρῶσιν διδόασιν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.3c. AD 100

τὸ τέλειον σκάνδαλον ἤγγικεν, περὶ οὖ γέγραπται, ὡς Ἐνὼχ λέγει.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

ZPE 14 (1974), p. 146-151Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)11 BC

ἐπιγονῆς ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων κατʼ ε … … ισουτ … … … Μάρωνος πρόβατα τέλεια σύμμικτα πεντήκοντα αἶγας δύο ἀθάνατα, ἅπερ παρειλήφασιν οἱ μεμισθωμένοι ὑγιῆ ἀσινῆ εὐτροφοῦντα τέλεια. παρειλήφασι

P. Gen. 1 23ArsinoitesAD 70

σοι ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων ἡμῖν ὀνικῶν κτηνῶν ὄνον ἕνα μυόχρουν κολοβὸν ἀνʼ ἅ ἐστιν, τέλειον τοῦτον τοιοῦτον ἀναπόριφον καὶ ἀπέχομεν τὴν τιμήν. Σαμβᾶς Ἡρακλείδου συναπέσχηκα ὡς πρόκειται καὶ συνπέπρακα.

P.Fam.Tebt. 29ArsinoitesAD 133

τῶν γραμμάτων τούτων ἀντιγράφου τοῖς τῆς διὰ τῆς ἐντεύξεως ἐνεχυραζομένης ὑποχρέου λεγομένης τετελευτηκέναι κληρονόμοις τελείοις ἐνωπίῳ, ἵνʼ εἰδῶσι, καὶ ἐὰν μὴ … … … ωσι ἐν ἡμέραις δέκα ,

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἀγάπηagapē love G26 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine ¶

116× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Unconditional love or affection, like the love God shows to humanity in John 3:16. It's also used to describe love between people, like in John 13:35.

Amplified meaning

divine love

Tyndale gloss

love

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀγάπη (i.e., *agape*) means love, particularly the spiritual love between God and humanity, as well as among individuals. It is often associated with goodwill and esteem, distinguishing it from other forms of love like friendship or romantic love. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in the context of Christian teachings on love, such as in John 13:35 and Romans 5:8. The plural form refers to communal love feasts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† ἀγάπη, -ης, ἡ

[in LXX for אַהֲבָה, which is also rendered by ἀγάπησις and φιλία;]

love, goodwill, esteem. Outside of bibl. and eccl. books, there is no clear instance (with Deiss., LAE, 18:4, 70:2, cf. the same writer in Constr. Quar., ii, 4; and with MM, VGT, s.v., cf. Dr. Moulton in Exp. Times, xxvi, 3, 139). In NT, like ἀγαπάω, -ῶ,

Of men's love:

to one another, Jo 13:35;

to God, I Jo 2:5.

Of divine love;

God's love: to men, Ro 5:8; to Christ, Jo 17:26;

Christ's love to men: Ro 8:35.

In pl., love feasts: Ju 12 (DB, iii, 157).

SYN.: φιλία. ἀ., signifying properly (v.s. ἀγαπάω) love which chooses its object, is taken over from LXX, where its connotation is more general, into NT, and there used exclusively to express that spiritual bond of love…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀγάπη, -ἧς, ἡ, ἃ purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyttenbach, following Reiske’s conjecture, long ago restored ἀγαπήσων in place of ἀγάπης, ὧν in Plut. sympos. quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof. auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used ἀγάπησις. “The Sept. use ἀγάπη for 138, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8; vii. 6; viii. 4,6, 7; [It is noticeable that the word first makes its appearance as a current term in the Song of Sol.;—certainly no undesigned evidence respecting the idea which the Alex. translators had of the love in this Song” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1,6; [2 S. xiii. 15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas.; it occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and Rey., but frequently in the…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀγαπη use in connexion with Ptolemy on the Rosetta stone, OG/S got (B.C. 196) ἠγαπημένου ὑπὸ τοῦ POa. Cf. a Munich papyrus in Chrest. I. 1091" (end of iii/B.c.), where Wilcken restores [Πτολεμαῖ]ος αἰωνόβιος ἠγα[πημένος ὑπὸ τῆς Ισιδος]. It may be noted that in Mk 10% Field (Λίοζες, Pp. 34) suggests the translation ‘‘caressed” for ἠγάπησεν, comparing Plut. Peric/. 1: ξένους τινὰς ἐν ἹΡώμῃ πλουσίους, κυνῶν τέκνα καὶ πιθήκων ἐν τοῖς κόλποις περιφέροντας καὶ ἀγαπῶντας (fondling) ἰδὼν ὁ Καῖσαρ. .. ἠρώτησεν εἰ παιδία παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς οὐ τίκτουσιν αἱ γυναῖκες. Β. L. Gildersleeve (Justin Martyr, p. 135) suggests that ‘the larger use of [ἀγαπᾶν] in Christian writers is perhaps due to an avoidance of φιλεῖν in the sense of ‘kissing.”” He says Xenophon made the two words absolute synonyms, comparing MZemorahsilia ii. 7. 9 with 12; while he deprecates refinements in Jn 2111", since ‘the Evangelist…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀγάπη (agapē) — love.

ἀγάπ-η, ἡ,

love, [LXX+2nd c.BC+] O; of the love of husband and wife, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. especially love of God for man and of man for God, [LXX+1st c.AD+]:—also brotherly love, charity, [NT]

II. in plural, love-feast, [NT]

III. alms, charity, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

IV. ἀγάπη θεῶν, title of Isis, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀγάπη

agape

from 25; love, i.e. affection or benevolence; specially (plural) a

love-feast:--(feast of) charity(-ably), dear, love.

see GREEK for 25

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀγάπη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

love

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγάπη agapē 116x

love, generosity, kindly concern, devotedness; pl. love-feasts, Jude 12

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀγάπη Deriv. uncertain. love: esp. brotherly love, charity; the love of God for man and of man for God, NTest.

in pl. a love-feast, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

luv ('ahebh, 'ahabhah, noun; phileo, agapao, verb; agape, noun): Love to both God and man is fundamental to true religion, whether as expressed in the Old Testament or the New Testament. Jesus Himself declared that all the law and the prophets hang upon love (Mt 22:40; Mr 12:28-34). Paul, in his matchless ode on love (1Co 13), makes it the greatest of the graces of the Christian life--greater than speaking with tongues, or the gift of prophecy, or the possession of a faith of superior excellence; for without love all these gifts and graces, desirable and useful as they are in themselves, are as nothing, certainly of no permanent value in the sight of God. Not that either Jesus or Paul underestimates the faith from which all the graces proceed, for this grace is recognized as…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Love

This word seems to require explanation only in the case of its use by our Lord in his interview with “Simon, the son of Jonas,” after his resurrection (John 21:16, 17). When our Lord says, “Lovest thou me?” he uses the Greek word agapas; and when Simon answers, he uses the Greek word philo, i.e., “I love.” This is the usage in the first and second questions put by our Lord; but in the third our Lord uses Simon’s word. The distinction between these two Greek words is thus fitly described by Trench:, ”Agapan has more of judgment and deliberate choice; philein has more of attachment and peculiar personal affection. Thus the ‘Lovest thou’ (Gr. agapas) on the lips of the Lord seems to Peter at this moment too cold a word, as though his Lord were keeping him at a distance, or at least not inviting him to draw near, as in the…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

GOD IS LOVE; AND HE THAT DWELLETH IN LOVE DWELLETH IN GOD, AND GOD IN HIM, 1Jo 4:16. Love is a chief attribute of Jehovah, the length and breadth and height and depth of which are beyond comprehension, for they are infinite, Eph 3:18,19. Between the three Persons of the Godhead, love is unutterable full, perfect, and blissful; towards holy angels and Christians, God’s love is an infinite fatherly complacency and affection; towards sinners, it is immeasurable compassion. It is shown in all his works and ways, and dictated his holy law, but is most signally displayed in the gospel, Joh 3:16. "Herein is love."

Holy love in man would make the whole heart and soul supremely delight in and obey God, and cordially and practically love all beings according to their character-the good…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ OF CHILDREN FOR PARENTS

See CHILDREN

→ OF GOD, LOVE OF

→ OF MAN FOR GOD Ex 20:6; De 5:10; 6:5; 7:9; 10:12; 11:1,13,22; 13:3; 30:6,16,20; Jos 22:5; 23:11; Ps 18:1; 31:23; 37:4; 45:10,11; 63:5,6; 69:35,36; 73:25,26; 91:14; 97:10; 116:1; 145:20; Pr 8:17; 23:26; Isa 56:6,7; Jer 2:2,3; Mt 22:37,38; Mr 12:29,30,32,33; Lu 11:42;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

98%love

love98% · 112×other renderings2% · 2×

114 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial35%subject29%object29%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 116 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἐνὅτιthat, since, bec

ἐν

σύἑαυτοῦἤDisj

καίand, even, also, nam

πίστιςfaith, belief, tἀδελφόςa brotherδύναμιςmight, power, ma

ἀγάπηlove116×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godΧριστόςanointed, the Meἐν

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of εἰς

σύ

καίand, even, also,ἔτιstill, yet, evenὅτιthat, since, bec

ὅς

ἔχωI have, hold, poἀγαπάωI loveεἰμίI am, exist

δέbut, on the other ha

μήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀγάπη · 116× in the New Testament

1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians Romans John 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy Colossians 2 Timothy Philippians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×ἀλλήλων×μένωI remain, abide×εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind×ὑπομονήendurance, steadfastness×τελειόωI complete, accomplish, make perfect×περιπατέωI walk, conduct my life×ζηλόωI am jealous, eager for×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Polycarp

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Unchangeableness of God 69c. AD 40

παρό μοι δοκεῖ τοῖς προειρημένοις δυσὶ κεφαλαίοις, τῷ τε „ὡς ἄνθρωπος“ καὶ τῷ „οὐχ ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὁ θεὸς“ ἕτερα δύο συνυφῆναι ἀκόλουθα καὶ συγγενῆ, φόβον τε καὶ ἀγάπην·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 21.7c. AD 96

τὸ ἀξιαγάπητον τῆς ἁγνείας ἦθος ἐνδειξάσθωσαν, τὸ ἀκέραιον τῆς πραΰτητος αὐτῶν βούλημα ἀποδειξάτωσαν, τὸ ἐπιεικὲς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτῶν διὰ τῆς σιγῆς φανερὸν ποιησάτωσαν, τὴν ἀγάπην αὐτῶν μὴ κατὰ προσκλίσεις, ἀλλὰ πᾶσιν τοῖς φοβουμένοις τὸν θεὸν ὁσίως…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

4th c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Got. 11AD 201–AD 325

πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν κυρίῳ βοηθεῖν, καὶ ταύταις ἀγομέναις πρὸς τὸν ἐπίτροπον ἐπιδώσεις τὴν ἀγάπην σου, διʼ ὧν ἐὰν παράσχῃ αὐταῖς. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι ἐν κυρίῳ.

Vigiliae Christianae 79 (2025), p. 201-210AD 301–AD 350

ἐν Διὸς Πόλει, ἵνα οὖν μαρτυρήσῃ ἡμῖν τὰ τῆς ἐν θεῷ σου ἀγάπης. προσαγόρευε ἐν κυρίῳ τὴν ποθεινοτάτην ἡμῶν θυγατέρα Μαρκιανὴν μετὰ καὶ ὅλων τῶν ἐν τῷ

P.Lond. 6 1914Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 335

ὅτι ἡμάρτησα καὶ ἐπαρῳνήθην ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ὅτι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς ὕβρισα. ἐποίησεν δὲ καὶ ἀγάπην ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ᾑμέρᾳ Ἑλλην ὢν διὰ τὸ ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐποίησεν.

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἔξωexō out G1854 Adverb ¶

62× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for out or outside, used in the Bible to describe physical locations, like outside a house, or spiritual conditions, like being outside the Church. It appears in Matthew 12:46 and 1 Corinthians 5:12.

Amplified meaning

casts away, expels

Tyndale gloss

out/outside(r)

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔξω (i.e., *exo*) is an adverb meaning 'outside' or 'without.' It can function adverbially or as a preposition with the genitive, indicating location or exclusion. The New Testament uses it in contexts such as being outside a house (e.g., Mt 12:46) or referring to those outside the Christian community (e.g., 1 Cor 5:12). It also appears in various phrases indicating motion or absence.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔξω

adv.

(< ἐξ),

[in LXX for חוּץ ;]

outside, without;

adverbially: Mt 12:46, Mk 3:31 11:4, Lk 8:20, Jo 18:16, al.; c. art., ὁ ἔ., he who is without; metaph., in pl., οἱ ἔ., of those outside the Church, I Co 5:12, 13, Col 4:5 (Lft., in l), I Th 4:12; ὁ ἔ. ἄνθρωπος, II Co 4:16; αἱ ἔ. πόλεις, Ac 26:11;

as prep. c. gen.: Lk 13:33, Ac 21:5, He 13:11, 12

After verbs of motion;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔξω, adv., (fr. ἐξ, as ἔσω and εἴσω fr. ἐς andeis); 1. without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. xi. 4; joined with verbs: ἑστάναι, Mt. xii. 46,47 [WH txt. om. the vs.]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. 16; xx. 11 [Lehm. om.]; καθῆσθαι, Mt. xxvi. 69; or with some other verb declaring that the person without is doing something, Mk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. ὁ ἔξω, absol. he who is without, prop. of place; metaph., in plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church [ οἵ. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; Mey. on Mk. as below]: 1 Co. v. 12, 13; Col. iv. 5; 1 Th.iv.12; those who are not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (ef. Meyer) WH umrg. ἔξωθεν, q. v-]. With a noun added: ai ἔξω πόλεις, foreign, Acts xxvi. 11; ὁ ἔξω ἄνθρωπος, the outer man, i. 6. the body (see ἄνθρωπος, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv.16. Ὄ. it takes the place of a prep. and is joined with the gen.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔξω (exō) — out/outside(r).

ἔξω,

adverb of ἐξ, as εἴσω of εἰς:

I. of Place,

I.1. with Verbs of motion, out or out of, ἔ. ἰών [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. τοὺς χριστιανούς (i.e. φέρε) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

I.1. b as preposition, with genitive, ἔ. χροὸς ἕλκε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. or γῆς ἔ. βαλεῖν, [Refs 8th c.BC+] sailing outside the H., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. without any sense of motion, outside, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ ἔ. the outside, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἔ. τῶν ὀμμάτων their prominency, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἔ. things outside the walls or house, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; external things, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἔ. πράγματα foreign affairs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἔ. those outside, [Refs]; of exiles, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but in NT, the heathen, [NT+5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἔ. θάλασσα, opposed to ἡ εἴσω, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ἔ. τὴν χεῖρα ἔχειν keep one's arm…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔξω

exo

adverb from 1537; out(-side, of doors), literally or

figuratively:--away, forth, (with-)out (of, -ward), strange.

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔξω

Adv

without, outside

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔξω exō 63x

can function as an improper prep., without, out of doors; Mt. 12:46, 47; ὁ, ἡ, τὸ ἔξω, outer, external, foreign, Acts 26:11; 2 Cor. 4:16; met. not belonging to one’s community, Mk. 4:11; 1 Cor. 5:12, 13; out, away, from a place or person, Mt. 5:13; 13:48; as a prep., out of, Mk. 5:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔξω adverb of ἐξ, as εἴσω of εἰς of Place

with Verbs of motion, out, ἔξω ἰών Od.; χωρεῖν ἔξω Hdt., etc.:—c. gen. out of, Hom., etc.:—c. acc., ἔξω τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον outside the H., Hdt.

without any sense of motion, like ἐκτός, outside, without, Od.: τὸ ἔξω the outside, Thuc.; τὰ ἔξω things outside the walls, id. Thuc.; τὰ ἔξω πράγματα foreign affairs, id. Thuc.;— οἱ ἔξω those outside, id. Thuc. (in NTest. the heathen); —ἡ ἔξω θάλασσα, the Ocean, opp. to ἡ ἐντός (the Mediterranean sea), Hdt.:—c. gen., οἱ ἔξω γένους Soph.; ἔξω τοξεύματος, ἔξω βελῶν out of shot, Thuc., Xen.; ἔξω τινὸς εἶναι to have nothing to do with it, Thuc.; ἔξω τοῦ φρονεῖν out of one's senses, Eur.:—proverb., ἔξω τοῦ πηλοῦ αἴρειν πόδα to keep clear of difficulties, Aesch.; πημάτων ἔξω πόδα ἔχειν id.…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

52%outside

outside52% · 34×out34% · 22×out of8% · 5×other renderings6% · 4×

65 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial94%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 62 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pἐκφέρωI bring out, carσύ

ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come out

καίand, even, also,σύαὐτός

ὁArticle the

πρόςδέbut, on the otheεἰς

ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, put o

αὐτόςδέbut, on the otheμήNeg

βάλλωI cast, throw, rush,

μήNegἐγώ

ἔξωout62×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πόλιςa cityἀμπελώνa vineyardπύληa door, gate

βάλλωI cast, throw, rush,

αὐτόςὁArticle the

κλαίωI weep, weep for, mo

πικρῶςbitterlyὡςas, like as, how

ζητέωI seek, search for,

αὐτόςσύ

ἵστημιI cause to stand, st

ζητέωI seek, search fκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔξω · 62× in the New Testament

John Acts Mark Luke Matthew Hebrews 1 Corinthians Revelation 1 John 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians Colossians

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, put out, banish, bring forth,×ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come out×πόλιςa city×πρός×βάλλωI cast, throw, rush, put, place, drop×ἀδελφόςa brother×ἵστημιI cause to stand, stand×ζητέωI seek, search for, desire×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

חוּץ82%H2351 · 57 verses מַחֲנֶהencampment, camp34%H4264 · 24 verses

Counted over the 69 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.54c. AD 40

διὰ τοῦτο καὶ „Μωυσῆς ἔξω τῆς παρεμβολῆς πήγνυσι τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνήν, μακρὰν ἀπὸ τῆς παρεμβολῆς, καὶ ἐκλήθη σκηνὴ μαρτυρίου“ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.20c. AD 75–95

οὔτε γὰρ αὐτῷ ποτʼ ἂν γενέσθαι νοῦν ἀγαθὸν τῷ νομοθέτῃ ταύτης ἀπολειπομένῳ τῆς θέας, οὔτε τῶν γραφησομένων εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον οὐδὲν ἀποβήσεσθαι τοῖς λαβοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ πρὸ παντὸς ἄλλου διδαχθεῖεν, ὅτι πάντων πατήρ τε καὶ δεσπότης ὁ θεὸς ὢν καὶ πάντα…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 4.11c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλος ʼΛαρὼν καὶ Μαριὰμ ἔξω τῆς παρεμβολῆς ηὐλίσθησαν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Bodl. 1 34Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 158–AD 159

ἀκινδύνων, τῶν εἰς ἑτέρους λόγους πρὸς διοίκησιν τελουμένων ὄντων πρὸς ἐμὲ τὸν μεμισθωμένον. οὐχ ἕξω δὲ κοινωνὸν οὐδὲ μίσθιον γενόμενον τῆς ὠνῆς ὑποτελῆ, ἐξουσίας σοι οὔσης ἑτέροις μεταμισθοῦν, ὁπότε

P. Cairo Cat. 10684 descr.ArsinoitesAD 161

vestiges Ἐξω Ψεῦρ Γάιος Οὐαλέριος Πάτρων ο … εἰς ἀνοικοδομὴν τάφου ἀρούρης ιϛ λβ … οἱ

P.Amh. 2 92Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 162–AD 163

τῶν εἰς ἑτέρους λόγους πρὸς διοίκησιν τελουμένων ὄντων πρὸς ἐμὲ τὸν Ἀνθέστιον Καπιτωλεῖνον. οὐχ ἕξω δὲ κοινωνὸν οὐδὲ μίσθιον γενόμενον τῆς ὠνῆς ὑποτελῆ, δώσω δὲ καὶ ὑπὲρ διπλώματος ἵππων

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

βάλλειballō casts G906 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular ¶

123× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in 1 John than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To throw something with force, as seen in Matthew 4:18 and 10:34, where Jesus talks about throwing a net and a sword. It can also mean to pour or lay something down. In the Bible, it is used in various contexts, including throwing out demons or laying down one's life.

Tyndale gloss

to throw: throw

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βάλλω (i.e., *ballō*) means to throw, cast, or place something, and can apply to both physical and metaphorical contexts. It is used in various ways, such as throwing weapons, pouring liquids, or even casting someone into a situation. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like casting out demons or laying down burdens. The lexicons do not indicate significant disagreement about its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βάλλω,

[in LXX for נפל, שׂום, ידד, etc.;]

prop., of a weapon or missile; then generally, of things and persons, lit. and metaph., to throw, cast, put, place: c. acc., seq. εἰς, Mt 4:18, and freq. ἐπί, Mt 10:34; κάτω, Mt 4:6; ἔξω, Mt 5:13; ἀπό, Mt 5:29; ἐκ, Mk 12:44; δρέπανον, Re 14:19; μάχαιραν, Mt 10:34; κλῆρον, Mt 27:35; of fluids, to pour: Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βάλλω; fut. Bara; pf. βέβληκα ; 2 aor. ἔβαλον (3 pers. plur. ἔβαλον in Lk. xxiii. 34; Acts xvi. 23, ἔβαλαν, {π6 Alex. form, in Acts xvi. 37 L T Tr WH; [Rev. xviii. 19 Lehm., see WH. App. p. 165 and] for reff. ἀπέρχομαι init.) ; Pass., [pres. βάλλομαι] ; pf. βέβλημαι ; plpf. ἐβεβλήμην; 1 aor. ἐβλήθην; 1 fut. βληθήσομαι ; to throw, — either with force, or without force yet with a purpose, or even carelessly ; 1. with force and effort: βάλλειν τινὰ ῥαπίσμασι to smite one with slaps, to buffet, ΜΚ. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, τινὰ βάλAew λίθοις, βέλεσι, τόξοις, etc., κακοῖς, ψόγῳ, σκώμμασι. etc., in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow i. p. 487; [L. and S.s. v. T. 1 and 3]; for the Rec. ἔβαλλον we must read with Fritzsche and Schott ἔβαλον, fr. which arose ἔλαβον, adopted by L T Tr WIL; βαλεῖν and λαβεῖν are often confounded in codd. ; οἵ. Grimm on 2 Mace. y. 6; [Serivener, Introd. p.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βάλλω. That the verb does not necessarily imply casting or thrusting with some degree of violence is clear already from the NT itself; and there are vernacular parallels to negative the assumption of “Jewish Greek.” Thus in BGU 11. 5974 (A.D. 75) ἵνα βάληι τὸν μόσχον mpd τῶν προβάτων the verb does not suggest a violent ‘‘ Βιησίηρ ἡ of the helpless calf before the ferocious beasts afterwards named. Cf. P Oxy VII. 1069%° (iii/A.pD.) κ[α]λὰ μέτρα αὐτῷ βαλέτωσαν, ‘let them put good measure into it” with reference to the making of a tunic, and 2d. VI. 9349 (iii/A.D.) μὴ οὖν ἀμελήσῃς τοῦ βαλεῖν τὴν κόπρον, “do not fail therefore to throw the manure on the land” (Edd.): ef. P Fay 1187! (a.p. 110) βάλλωι ἕξ ἀρούρας εἰς τὴν Ψεννόφριν, “1 am manuring six arourae at Psennophris” (Edd.). For a similar absolute usage see Sy// 5227 (iii/p.c.) θύειν δὲ τὸμ μὲν βοῦν BeBAnκότα, τὴν δὲ οἷν βεβληκ[υ]ῖαν…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βάλλω (ballō) — to throw: throw.

βάλλω,

future βᾰλῶ (in Attic dialect Prose only in compounds), Ionic dialect βαλέω [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἔβᾰλον, Ionic dialect προ-βάλεσκε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later aorist 1 ἔβαλα [LXX]; Epic dialect and Ionic dialect infinitive βαλέειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative βλείης in [Refs 5th c.BC+], participle βλείς [Refs]perfect βέβληκα: pluperfect ἐβεβλήκειν, Epic dialect βεβλήκειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, Ionic dialect imperfect βαλλέσκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]future βᾰλοῦμαι (προ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἐβᾰλόμην, Ionic dialect imperative βαλεῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+] used mostly in compounds:—passive, future βληθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle δια-βεβλησόμενος [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: aorist ἐβλήθην [Refs 8th c.BC+] also has an Epic dialect aorist passive, ἔβλητο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive βλήεται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative βλῇο or βλεῖο [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

βάλλω

ballo

a primary verb; to throw (in various applications, more or less

violent or intense):--arise, cast (out), X dung, lay, lie, pour, put

(up), send, strike, throw (down), thrust. Compare 4496.

see GREEK for 4496

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βάλλω

v.

I cast, throw, rush, put, place, drop

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀμφιβάλλω amphiballō 1x

to throw around; to cast a net, Mk. 1:16*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βάλλω Root ΒΑΛ Act. to throw:

with acc. of person or thing aimed at, to throw so as to hit, to hit one with a missile, opp. to striking (τύπτω, οὐτάω), βλήμενος ἠὲ τυπείς Il.; c. dupl. acc. pers. et partis, μιν βάλε μηρὸν ὀϊστῶι id. Il.: c. acc. cogn. added, ἕλκος, τό μιν βάλε the wound which he gave him, id. Il.:—also, βάλε κατ᾽ ἀσπίδα smote upon it, id. Il.

of things, ἡνίοχον ῥαθάμιγγες ἔβαλλον id. Il.; of the Sun, ἀκτῖσιν ἔβαλλεν [χθόνα] Od.: to strike the senses, of sound, κτύπος οὔατα βάλλει Il.

metaph., β. τινὰ κακοῖς to smite with reproaches, Soph., etc.; φθόνος βάλλει τινά Aesch.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

15%cast

cast15% · 19×they cast8% · 10×casting6% · 7×do cast6% · 7×he cast3% · 4×thrown3% · 4×be cast3% · 4×other renderings47% · 58×other renderings8% · 10×

123 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 61 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 123 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςαἴρωI raise, lift upἧλοςa nail

αὐτός

ἱμάτιονouter garmentπερισσεύωI exceed, am lefἀδελφόςa brother

ἔχωI have, hold, posses

πούςthe footὀφθαλμόςthe eyeὅσος

πῦρfire, trials

εἰςὁArticle the

ἐγώ

παῖςa boy or girl chἐνἱματισμόςraiment, clothin

βάλλωcasts123×

what comes after →

εἰς

ὁArticle theφυλακήa watching, guarγέενναGehenna

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godδάκτυλοςa fingerδράκωνa dragon or huge

αὐτός

εἰςὁArticle the

ἀπό

σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

πυρέσσωI am sick with aὁράωI see, look uponεἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβάλλω · 123× in the New Testament

Matthew Revelation Mark Luke John Acts 1 John James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament8 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἰς×πῦρfire, trials×φυλακήa watching, guard, prison, imprisonment×γῆthe earth, soil, land×θάλασσαthe sea, lake×δύο×ἔξωwithout, outside×γέενναGehenna×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

נָפַלfall, lie29%H5307 · 8 verses גּוֹרָלlot29%H1486 · 8 verses גָּדוֹלgreat18%H1419 · 5 verses

Counted over the 27 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Preliminary Studies 129c. AD 40

21,20) ἢ βαλλόμενον καὶ τοξευόμενον ἀποκύουσι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.98c. AD 75–95

εὐμενῶς τε οὖν αὐτὸν προσδέχεσθαι τὴν θυσίαν παρεκάλει καὶ μηδεμίαν ὀργὴν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ὁμοίαν βαλεῖν, ὅπως ἔργοις τε τοῖς ταύτης προσλιπαροῦντες καὶ πόλεις ἀναστήσαντες εὐδαιμόνως ζῆν ἔχοιεν καὶ μηδενὸς ὧν καὶ πρὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἀπέλαυον ὑστερῶσιν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.6c. AD 100

Περιέσχεν με συναγωγὴ πονηρευομένων, ἐκύκλωσάν με ὡσεὶ μέλισσαι κηρίον, καί: Ἐπὶ τὸν ἱματισμόν μου ἔβαλον κλῆρον.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Fay. 118Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 110

ἐπεὶ κοπρηγεῖν μέλλει τὰ κτήνη εἰς Ψεννῶιφριν, ἔχοντας βελενκώθια καὶ σηστρίδια ὡσεὶ εἰς ξυλαμήν. βάλλω ἓξ ἀρούρας εἰς τὴν Ψεννῶφριν. ἐὰν ἀναβαίνῃ τὰ κτήνη γέμισον αὐτὰ βάκανον καὶ ξύλον.

P.Sijp. 9 dThebenAD 101–AD 200

κιβαριάτου τ … τοῦ ὄξους οὔπω πέπρακα … κριθῆς. ἔλαβον ἄλλας δύο ἀρτάβας καὶ ἔβαλον αὐτὰς ἐπάνω τῶν ἄλλων ἀρταβῶν ϛ. ἔχω παρα … ὡς ἐνετείλω μοι. ἄσπασαι Σαραπάμμωνα

O.Claud. 4 887Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

ἐστομώσαμεν σίδηρα εἰς στόμωμα καὶ εἰς τοὺς σφῆνας. ὡς βάλλουσι τοὺς σφῆνας εὐχαριστοῦμεν αὐτοῖς. βέβληται καὶ ἐπιβεβλήμεθα … τὴν πλάκα. εἰ οὖν θέλεις ἵνα ἀπαρτισθῇ, ἔξελθε στομώσειν αὐτοῖς καὶ

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

τὸνho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

φόβον,phobos fear, G5401 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

47× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Fear or alarm that causes people to be terrified, as seen in Luke 1:12 and Acts 5:5. This term describes a feeling of dread or terror. It is the fear that people experience in difficult situations.

Amplified meaning

fear of punishment

Tyndale gloss

fear

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φόβος (phobos) means fear, terror, or reverence. It is derived from the verb φέβομαι (to be put in fear) and encompasses a range of meanings from panic to awe. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Luke 1:12 and Romans 8:15. Some lexicons note a distinction between φόβος and other terms for fear, indicating its nuanced use.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — δειλία, φόβος, εὐλάβεια from a scan

Or these three words the first, δειλία, is used always in a bad sense ; the second, φόβος, is a middle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an evil, and lying indifferently between the two; the third, εὐλάβεια, is quite predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not altogether escaped being employed in an evil. Δειλία, equivalent to the Latin ‘ timor,’ and having θρασύτης (‘foolhardiness’) for its contrary extreme (Plato, Tim. 87 a), is our ‘cowardice.’ It occurs only once in the N. T., 2 Tim. i. 7; where Bengel says, exactly on what authority I know not, ‘ Est timor cujus cause potius in animo sunt quam foris;’ but δειλιάω at John xiv. 27; and δειλός at Matt. vil. 26; Mark iv. 40; Rev. xxi. 8: the δειλοί in this last passage being those who in time of persecution have under fear of suffering denied the faith; cf. Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. viii. 8. It is joined to…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φόβος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX chiefly for יִרְאָה, also for פַּחַד, אֵימָה, etc. ;]

in Hom., flight.

That which causes flight, fear, dread, terror: Lk 1:12, Ac 5:5, I Ti 5:20. I Jo 4:18, al.; cogn. acc., φοβεῖσθαι φ., Mk 4:41, Lk 2:9; c. gen. obj., Jo 7:13 19:33 20:19, He 2:5, I Pe 3:14 (but cf. ICC, in l.);ἀπὸ (τοῦ) φ., Mt 14:26, Lk 21:26; εἰς φ.,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φόβος, -ov, 6, (φέβομαι ; like φόρος, τρόμος, πόνος, fr. Φέρω, τρέμω, πένομαι), ἔτ. Hom. down, Sept. for 7X1, ἽΠ9,

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φόβος, igo 2h 25: 230} (5 ΒΙῸΣ: γειτνιώντων Θραικῶν φόβον, P Fay 2151 (A.D. 134) τῷ τοῦ προστίμου φόβῳ, ‘by the fear of incurring penalties,’ P Oxy XIV. 16681® (iii/A.D.) ὃ ἡγεμὼν ἀμνησίαν ἔπεμψεν ἐνθάδε, καὶ οὐκέτι φόβος οὐδὲ εἷς ever, “the praefect has sent an aninesty here, and there is no longer any fear at all’’ (Edd.), and BGU II. 5471 (Byz.) μέγας φόβος ἐπίκειται ἡμῖν. For the plur. as in 2 Cor 7°, see Sy// 168 (= 3 326)*1 (B.c. 307-6) kal φόβων κ[αὶ κινδύνων μεγάλων τοὺς] Ἕλληνας περιστάντων. The reverential fear towards God, which appears in such a passage as Ac 91, may be illustrated from P Lond 1914}? (A.D. 335°) φόβον θεοῦ ἔχοντες ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ : cf. 7. IV. 139318. In 2 Cor 5% Field (Votes, p. 183) prefers the rendering ‘‘terror,’’ as against RV…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φόβος (phobos) — fear.

φόβος, ὁ,

(φέβομαι) panic flight, the usual sense in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φόβονδ᾽ ἔχε μώνυχας ἵππους [Refs]; μή τι φόβονδ᾽ ἀγόρευε counsel not to flight,[Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. Φόβος personified, as son of Ares, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; worshipped at Selinus, [Refs]

II. panic fear, [στρατῷ] φ. ἐμβάλλειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; generally, fear, terror (distinguished from δέος (which see)), τορὸς ὀρθόθριξ φ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joined with δέος and δεῖμα, (see entry).; opposed to θάρρος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes in milder sense, doubt, scruple, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔχει πολλὴν ὑποψίαν καὶ φ. ὡς.. [Refs]: also, awe, reverence, for a ruler or divine being, τοῦ ἡγεμόνος [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; θεοῦ [LXX+4th c.AD+].—Construction, a. with genitive object, fear or dread of.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. περὶ τοῦ καρποῦ fear for or…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φόβος

phobos

from a primary phebomai (to be put in fear); alarm or fright:--be

afraid, + exceedingly, fear, terror.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φόβος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

fear, terror, reverence

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φόβος phobos 47x

fear, terror, affright, Mt. 14:26; Lk. 1:12; astonishment, amazement, Mt. 28:8; Mk. 4:41; trembling concern, 1 Cor. 2:3; 2 Cor. 7:15; meton. a terror, an object or cause of terror, Rom. 13:5; reverential fear, awe, Acts 9:31; Rom. 3:18; respect, deference, Rom. 13:7; 1 Pet. 2:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φόβος φόβος, ὁ, φέβομαι flight, Lat. fuga, the only sense in Hom.; φόβονδε ῀ φύγαδε, μή τι φόβονδ᾽ ἀγόρευε counsel not to flight, Il., etc.:— Φόβος is personified as son of Ares, id. Il., Hes.

panic fear, such as causes flight, στρατῷ φ. ἐμβάλλειν Hdt.:—then generally, fear, terror, properly of the outward show of fear, and so distinguished from δέος (the sensation of fear), Aesch., etc.: the Object of fear is in gen., fear of another, id. Aesch., etc.; so φ. ἀπό τινος Xen.; ἔκ τινος Aesch.; πρός τινος Soph.;—but, φ. περί or ὑπέρ τινος fear for or concerning . . , Thuc.:—with Verbs, ποιεῖν or παρέχειν τινί Xen.; φόβον ἐμβάλλειν, ἐντιθέναι τινί to strike terror into one, Lat. metum incutere alicui, Xen., etc.;—of the person who feels fear, φόβον λαμβάνειν Eur.; φόβος ἔχει με Aesch.; f. e)mpi/ptei moi Xen.; διὰ φόβου ἔρχομαι…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fer (yir'ah, yare'; phobos, phobeo):

Terms, etc.:

"Fear" is the translation of many words in the Old Testament; the chief are: yir'ah, "fear," "terror," "reverence," "awe," most often "the fear of God," "fear of Yahweh" (Ge 20:11; 2Ch 19:9, etc.); also of "fear" generally (Job 22:4; Isa 7:25; Eze 30:13, etc.); yare', "to be afraid," "to fear," "to reverence" (Ge 15:1; Le 19:3,14; De 6:2, etc.); pachadh, "fear," "terror," "dread" (

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See COWARDICE

→ Also see FEAR OF GOD, below

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

83%fear

fear83% · 38×respect7% · 3×awe2% · 1×terror2% · 1×fears2% · 1×reverence2% · 1×threats2% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial51%subject26%object17%predicate4%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 47 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

διάἀπόδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

καίand, even, also,ἁγιωσύνηa holy or sanctiἀλλήλων

μετά

μνημεῖονa tomb, sepulcheὡςas, like as, howκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁράωI see, look uponπραΰτηςmildness, gentleαὐτός

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

καίand, even, also,

φόβοςfear,47×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸουδαῖοςJewishκύριοςlord, Lord, mastὁArticle the

καίand, even, also, nam

τρόμοςa tremblingχαράjoy, gladnessπροσδοκίαexpectation, wai

μέγας

ἐπίκαίand, even, also,συνέχωI press together

αὐτός

σείωI shakeμήNeg

θεόςGod, a god

ἀπέναντιover against, op

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφόβος · 47× in the New Testament

Luke 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Acts Romans 1 John John Matthew Revelation Ephesians 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μέγας×διά×μετά×φόβοςfear, terror, reverence×τρόμοςa trembling×φοβέωI fear, am terrified×ἐπιπίπτωI fall upon, press upon×ἸουδαῖοςJewish×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

פַּ֫חַדdread22%H6343 · 23 verses יִרְאָהfear21%H3374 · 22 verses

Counted over the 101 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 79c. AD 40

τουτὶ δὲ συμβήσεται, ἐὰν μήτε αἱ ἄλογοι ἡδοναὶ ψυχῆς δυναστεύσωσι γαστριμαργίαν καὶ λαγνείαν ἐπιτειχίσασαι μήτε αἱ δόξης ἢ χρημάτων ἢ ἀρχῆς ἐπιθυμίαι τὸ τοῦ βίου κράτος ἀνάψωνται μήτε στείλωσι καὶ κάμψωσι διάνοιαν αἱ λῦπαι μήθ’ ὁ κακὸς σύμβουλος…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Worp 16AD 11

σιος Δωριεὺς Φλελεμούθι πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ ὑγιαίνειν. μὴ φοβοῦ περὶ τῶν σκευῶν ὧν ἔχεις ἀλλὰ ἀσφάλισαι, ἂν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ μεταλλάρχης ἔλθῃ ἐρωτῶν‧

P.Fay. 21Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 134

ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται τῷ τοῦ προστίμου φόβῳ, δυνήσονται μαρτυρίαν vestiges ποιήσασθαι περὶ τῶν μὴ προσιεμένων οἱ μὴ διδόντες ὅπως τῆς ἀπειθίας

BGU 2 372ArsinoitesAD 154

τινὰς ἐκφυγόντας διὰ τὴν τότε περὶ αὐτοὺς ἀσθένειαν ἐν ἀλλοδαπῇ ἔτι καὶ νῦν διατρίβειν φόβῳ τῶν γενομένων παραυτίκα προγραφῶν. προτρέπομαι οὖν πάντας ἐπανελθεῖν ἐπὶ τὰ ἴδια καὶ τὸν μὲν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ὅτιhoti because G3754 Conjunction ¶

1,293× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'that' or 'because', used to introduce a reason or explanation. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 3:9 and Romans 8:38. It helps to show cause and effect in sentences.

Tyndale gloss

that/since: that

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅτι,

conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις).

As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that;

after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mt 3:9 6:32 11:25, Mk 3:28, Lk 2:49, Jo 2:22, Ac 4:13, Ro 1:13 8:38 10:9, Phl 4:15, Ja 2:24, al.; elliptically, Jo 6:46, Phl 3:12, al.

After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or pers. pron., Jo 3:19 16:19, Ro 9:6, I Jo 3:16 al.; c. pron. interrog., Mt 8:27, Mk 4:41,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.

ὅτῐ,

Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:

I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:

I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅτι

hoti

neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes

redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,

because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.

see GREEK for 3748

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅτι

Cj.

that, since, because

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅτι hoti 1x

originally was the neuter of ὅστις, that, Mt. 2:16, 22, 23; 6:5, 16; often used pleonastically in reciting another’s words, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 19:42; Acts 5:23; as a causal particle, for that, for, because, Mt. 2:18; 5:3, 4, 5; 13:13; because, seeing that, since, Lk. 23:40; Acts 1:17

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

be-kos' (hina, "in order that"): "The multitude rebuked them, because (AV; the Revised Version (British and American) "that") they should hold their peace" (Mt 20:31).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%that

that64% · 856×because19% · 252×for16% · 209×other renderings1% · 12×

1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγάρforδέbut, on the othe

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςσύδέbut, on the othe

οἶδαI know, remember

οὐNegκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciπερί

γινώσκωI come to know, lear

οὗτοςκαίand, even, also,αὐτός

ὅτιbecause1293×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father,

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existοἶδαI know, rememberδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ἐγώ

εἰμίI am, existοὐNegὁArticle the

οὗτος

εἰμίI am, existὁArticle theποιέωI do, make

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theῥῆμαa thing spokenζητέωI seek, search f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅτι · 1,293× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 John Revelation 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶδαI know, remember×γινώσκωI come to know, learn, realize×ἀμήνHebr×μαρτυρέωI witness, testify×δοκέωI think, seem, appear, it seems×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 8c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

C.Erbstreit14Diospolis Magna (Theben)187 BC

καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν

P.Grenf. 1 10 p. 24Hermonthis149 BC

ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ὁho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

φόβοςphobos fear G5401 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

47× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Fear or alarm that causes people to be terrified, as seen in Luke 1:12 and Acts 5:5. This term describes a feeling of dread or terror. It is the fear that people experience in difficult situations.

Amplified meaning

fear of God's judgment

Tyndale gloss

fear

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φόβος (phobos) means fear, terror, or reverence. It is derived from the verb φέβομαι (to be put in fear) and encompasses a range of meanings from panic to awe. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Luke 1:12 and Romans 8:15. Some lexicons note a distinction between φόβος and other terms for fear, indicating its nuanced use.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — δειλία, φόβος, εὐλάβεια from a scan

Or these three words the first, δειλία, is used always in a bad sense ; the second, φόβος, is a middle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an evil, and lying indifferently between the two; the third, εὐλάβεια, is quite predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not altogether escaped being employed in an evil. Δειλία, equivalent to the Latin ‘ timor,’ and having θρασύτης (‘foolhardiness’) for its contrary extreme (Plato, Tim. 87 a), is our ‘cowardice.’ It occurs only once in the N. T., 2 Tim. i. 7; where Bengel says, exactly on what authority I know not, ‘ Est timor cujus cause potius in animo sunt quam foris;’ but δειλιάω at John xiv. 27; and δειλός at Matt. vil. 26; Mark iv. 40; Rev. xxi. 8: the δειλοί in this last passage being those who in time of persecution have under fear of suffering denied the faith; cf. Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. viii. 8. It is joined to…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φόβος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX chiefly for יִרְאָה, also for פַּחַד, אֵימָה, etc. ;]

in Hom., flight.

That which causes flight, fear, dread, terror: Lk 1:12, Ac 5:5, I Ti 5:20. I Jo 4:18, al.; cogn. acc., φοβεῖσθαι φ., Mk 4:41, Lk 2:9; c. gen. obj., Jo 7:13 19:33 20:19, He 2:5, I Pe 3:14 (but cf. ICC, in l.);ἀπὸ (τοῦ) φ., Mt 14:26, Lk 21:26; εἰς φ.,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φόβος, -ov, 6, (φέβομαι ; like φόρος, τρόμος, πόνος, fr. Φέρω, τρέμω, πένομαι), ἔτ. Hom. down, Sept. for 7X1, ἽΠ9,

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φόβος, igo 2h 25: 230} (5 ΒΙῸΣ: γειτνιώντων Θραικῶν φόβον, P Fay 2151 (A.D. 134) τῷ τοῦ προστίμου φόβῳ, ‘by the fear of incurring penalties,’ P Oxy XIV. 16681® (iii/A.D.) ὃ ἡγεμὼν ἀμνησίαν ἔπεμψεν ἐνθάδε, καὶ οὐκέτι φόβος οὐδὲ εἷς ever, “the praefect has sent an aninesty here, and there is no longer any fear at all’’ (Edd.), and BGU II. 5471 (Byz.) μέγας φόβος ἐπίκειται ἡμῖν. For the plur. as in 2 Cor 7°, see Sy// 168 (= 3 326)*1 (B.c. 307-6) kal φόβων κ[αὶ κινδύνων μεγάλων τοὺς] Ἕλληνας περιστάντων. The reverential fear towards God, which appears in such a passage as Ac 91, may be illustrated from P Lond 1914}? (A.D. 335°) φόβον θεοῦ ἔχοντες ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ : cf. 7. IV. 139318. In 2 Cor 5% Field (Votes, p. 183) prefers the rendering ‘‘terror,’’ as against RV…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φόβος (phobos) — fear.

φόβος, ὁ,

(φέβομαι) panic flight, the usual sense in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φόβονδ᾽ ἔχε μώνυχας ἵππους [Refs]; μή τι φόβονδ᾽ ἀγόρευε counsel not to flight,[Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. Φόβος personified, as son of Ares, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; worshipped at Selinus, [Refs]

II. panic fear, [στρατῷ] φ. ἐμβάλλειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; generally, fear, terror (distinguished from δέος (which see)), τορὸς ὀρθόθριξ φ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joined with δέος and δεῖμα, (see entry).; opposed to θάρρος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes in milder sense, doubt, scruple, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔχει πολλὴν ὑποψίαν καὶ φ. ὡς.. [Refs]: also, awe, reverence, for a ruler or divine being, τοῦ ἡγεμόνος [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; θεοῦ [LXX+4th c.AD+].—Construction, a. with genitive object, fear or dread of.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. περὶ τοῦ καρποῦ fear for or…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φόβος

phobos

from a primary phebomai (to be put in fear); alarm or fright:--be

afraid, + exceedingly, fear, terror.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φόβος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

fear, terror, reverence

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φόβος phobos 47x

fear, terror, affright, Mt. 14:26; Lk. 1:12; astonishment, amazement, Mt. 28:8; Mk. 4:41; trembling concern, 1 Cor. 2:3; 2 Cor. 7:15; meton. a terror, an object or cause of terror, Rom. 13:5; reverential fear, awe, Acts 9:31; Rom. 3:18; respect, deference, Rom. 13:7; 1 Pet. 2:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φόβος φόβος, ὁ, φέβομαι flight, Lat. fuga, the only sense in Hom.; φόβονδε ῀ φύγαδε, μή τι φόβονδ᾽ ἀγόρευε counsel not to flight, Il., etc.:— Φόβος is personified as son of Ares, id. Il., Hes.

panic fear, such as causes flight, στρατῷ φ. ἐμβάλλειν Hdt.:—then generally, fear, terror, properly of the outward show of fear, and so distinguished from δέος (the sensation of fear), Aesch., etc.: the Object of fear is in gen., fear of another, id. Aesch., etc.; so φ. ἀπό τινος Xen.; ἔκ τινος Aesch.; πρός τινος Soph.;—but, φ. περί or ὑπέρ τινος fear for or concerning . . , Thuc.:—with Verbs, ποιεῖν or παρέχειν τινί Xen.; φόβον ἐμβάλλειν, ἐντιθέναι τινί to strike terror into one, Lat. metum incutere alicui, Xen., etc.;—of the person who feels fear, φόβον λαμβάνειν Eur.; φόβος ἔχει με Aesch.; f. e)mpi/ptei moi Xen.; διὰ φόβου ἔρχομαι…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fer (yir'ah, yare'; phobos, phobeo):

Terms, etc.:

"Fear" is the translation of many words in the Old Testament; the chief are: yir'ah, "fear," "terror," "reverence," "awe," most often "the fear of God," "fear of Yahweh" (Ge 20:11; 2Ch 19:9, etc.); also of "fear" generally (Job 22:4; Isa 7:25; Eze 30:13, etc.); yare', "to be afraid," "to fear," "to reverence" (Ge 15:1; Le 19:3,14; De 6:2, etc.); pachadh, "fear," "terror," "dread" (

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See COWARDICE

→ Also see FEAR OF GOD, below

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

83%fear

fear83% · 38×respect7% · 3×awe2% · 1×terror2% · 1×fears2% · 1×reverence2% · 1×threats2% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial51%subject26%object17%predicate4%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 47 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

διάἀπόδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

καίand, even, also,ἁγιωσύνηa holy or sanctiἀλλήλων

μετά

μνημεῖονa tomb, sepulcheὡςas, like as, howκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁράωI see, look uponπραΰτηςmildness, gentleαὐτός

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

καίand, even, also,

φόβοςfear47×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸουδαῖοςJewishκύριοςlord, Lord, mastὁArticle the

καίand, even, also, nam

τρόμοςa tremblingχαράjoy, gladnessπροσδοκίαexpectation, wai

μέγας

ἐπίκαίand, even, also,συνέχωI press together

αὐτός

σείωI shakeμήNeg

θεόςGod, a god

ἀπέναντιover against, op

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφόβος · 47× in the New Testament

Luke 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Acts Romans 1 John John Matthew Revelation Ephesians 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μέγας×διά×μετά×φόβοςfear, terror, reverence×τρόμοςa trembling×φοβέωI fear, am terrified×ἐπιπίπτωI fall upon, press upon×ἸουδαῖοςJewish×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

פַּ֫חַדdread22%H6343 · 23 verses יִרְאָהfear21%H3374 · 22 verses

Counted over the 101 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 79c. AD 40

τουτὶ δὲ συμβήσεται, ἐὰν μήτε αἱ ἄλογοι ἡδοναὶ ψυχῆς δυναστεύσωσι γαστριμαργίαν καὶ λαγνείαν ἐπιτειχίσασαι μήτε αἱ δόξης ἢ χρημάτων ἢ ἀρχῆς ἐπιθυμίαι τὸ τοῦ βίου κράτος ἀνάψωνται μήτε στείλωσι καὶ κάμψωσι διάνοιαν αἱ λῦπαι μήθ’ ὁ κακὸς σύμβουλος…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Worp 16AD 11

σιος Δωριεὺς Φλελεμούθι πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ ὑγιαίνειν. μὴ φοβοῦ περὶ τῶν σκευῶν ὧν ἔχεις ἀλλὰ ἀσφάλισαι, ἂν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ μεταλλάρχης ἔλθῃ ἐρωτῶν‧

P.Fay. 21Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 134

ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται τῷ τοῦ προστίμου φόβῳ, δυνήσονται μαρτυρίαν vestiges ποιήσασθαι περὶ τῶν μὴ προσιεμένων οἱ μὴ διδόντες ὅπως τῆς ἀπειθίας

BGU 2 372ArsinoitesAD 154

τινὰς ἐκφυγόντας διὰ τὴν τότε περὶ αὐτοὺς ἀσθένειαν ἐν ἀλλοδαπῇ ἔτι καὶ νῦν διατρίβειν φόβῳ τῶν γενομένων παραυτίκα προγραφῶν. προτρέπομαι οὖν πάντας ἐπανελθεῖν ἐπὶ τὰ ἴδια καὶ τὸν μὲν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

κόλασινkolasis punishment G2851 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for punishment or penalty, as used in Matthew 25:46 and 1 John 4:18. It refers to the consequences of wrongdoing, and can also imply correction or discipline. This concept is central to biblical teachings on justice.

Amplified meaning

penalty or chastisement

Tyndale gloss

punishment

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κόλασις (kolasis) refers to punishment or correction, derived from the verb κολάζω (kolazo). It encompasses the ideas of chastisement and penalty, often with a focus on divine retribution, as seen in Matthew 25:46 and 1 John 4:18. The term has been used in various contexts, including philosophical discussions, but its primary meaning in the New Testament relates to punitive measures.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κόλασις, -εως, ἡ,

(< κολάζω),

[in LXX: Ez 14:3-7 18:30 44:12, (מִכְשׁוֹל) 43:11, λαμβάνειν τὴν κ. (כּלם ni.); Wi 11:13 16:2, 24 19:4, Je 18:20, II-IV Mac5*;]

correction, penalty, punishment: Mt 25:46, I Jo 4:18.†

SYN.: τιμωρία, requital. Arist. distinguishes between κ. as that which, being disciplinary, has reference to the sufferer, and τ. as that which, being penal, has reference to the satisfaction of him who inflicts (v. Thayer, s.v. κ., and cf. Tr., Syn., § vii). But in late Gk. especially, the distinction is not always maintained (v. reff. in Thayer).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κόλασις, -ews, 7, (κολάζω), correction, punishment, penalty: Mt. xxv. 46; κόλασιν ἔχει, brings with it or has connected with it the thought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. 18. (Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., ete.; 2 Mace. iv. 38; 4 Mace. viii. 8; Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, ete.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77, (9); 4, 44, (3); Ael. v. h. 7, 15; al.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κόλασις. For κόλασις = “ punishment,” cf. δγ} 68018 (Rom.) καὶ πρὸς τὴν κόλασιν ἀγέτωσαν τοὺς αἰτίους οἱ [ἄρχ]οντες. In 1 Jn 418 the idea of ‘‘deprivation,” a kind of foena damni (see above s.v. κολάζω), is decidedly helpful: fear checks development, and is the antithesis of τελείωσις which love works. For κόλασις, with reference to the next world as in Mt 25%, cf. the fragment of an uncanonical gospel P Oxy V. 840% οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς ζωοῖς μόνοις ἀπολαμβάνουσιν οἱ κακοῦργοι τῶν ἀν(θρώπ)ων ἀλλὰ [κ]αὶ κόλασιν ὑπομένουσιν καὶ πολ[λ]ὴν βάσανον, ““οΥ the evil-doers among men receive their reward not among the living only, but also await punishment and much torment” (Edd.). In the Apoc. of Peter τόπος κολάσεως = “hell,” and in MGr κόλασις is used alone in the same…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κόλασις (kolasis) — punishment.

κόλ-ᾰσις, εως, ἡ,

checking the growth of trees, especially almond-trees, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. chastisement, correction, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to τιμωρία, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of divine retribution, [NT+5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κόλασις

kolasis

from 2849; penal infliction:--punishment, torment.

see GREEK for 2849

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κόλασις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

chastisement, punishment

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κόλασις kolasis 2x

chastisement, punishment, Mt. 25:46; painful disquietude, torment, 1 Jn. 4:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κόλασις κόλα^σις, εως κολάζω chastisement, correction, punishment, Plat., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Punishment

The New Testament lays down the general principles of good government, but contains no code of laws for the punishment of offenders. Punishment proceeds on the principle that there is an eternal distinction between right and wrong, and that this distinction must be maintained for its own sake. It is not primarily intended for the reformation of criminals, nor for the purpose of deterring others from sin. These results may be gained, but crime in itself demands punishment. (See MURDER; THEFT.)

Endless, of the impenitent and unbelieving. The rejection of this doctrine “cuts the ground from under the gospel...blots out the attribute of retributive justice; transmutes sin into misfortune instead of guilt; turns all suffering into chastisement; converts the piacular work of Christ into moral influence...The attempt to retain the evangelical theology in connection with it is futile”…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ DEATH PENALTY

Will not be commuted Nu 35:31

In the Mosaic law the death penalty was inflicted

For murder Ge 9:5,6; Nu 35:16-21,30-33; De 17:6

For adultery Le 20:10; De 22:24

For incest Le 20:11,12,14

For bestiality Ex 22:19; Le 20:15,16

For sodomy Le 18:22; 20:13

For sexual immorality De 22:21-24

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%punishment

punishment100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

εἰς

οὗτος

φόβοςfear, terror, revere

ὁArticle the

κόλασιςpunishment2×

what comes after →

αἰώνιοςeternal, unending

ὁArticle the

ἔχωI have, hold, posses

ὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκόλασις · 2× in the New Testament

1 John Matthew

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

פָּנֶהpl. פָּנִים face, also faces71%H6440 · 5 verses מִכְשׁוֹלa stumbling, means or occasion of stumbling, stumbli71%H4383 · 5 verses עָוֹןiniquity, guilt, or punishment of iniquity71%H5771 · 5 verses בֵּיתfem. of בַּיִן, בֵּין prep. between H1004b בַּ֫יִת h71%H1004 · 5 verses H1544 [גִּלּוּל] only pl. idols (= logs, blocks, sha57%H1544 · 4 verses יִשְׂרָאֵלIsrael (Ēl persisteth, persevereth)57%H3478 · 4 verses

Counted over the 7 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 131c. AD 40

τῶν γὰρ περὶ τὸν θεὸν δυνάμεων ἀρίστων πασῶν μία οὖσα ταῖς ἄλλαις ἰσότιμος ἡ νομοθετικὴ — νομοθέτης γὰρ καὶ "πηγὴ νόμων αὐτός, ἀφ’ οὗ πάντες οἱ κατὰ μέρος νομοθέται — διχῆ πέφυκε τέμνεσθαι, τῇ μὲν εἰς εὐεργεσίαν κατορθούντων, τῇ δὲ εἰς κόλασιν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.60c. AD 75–95

οὐκ ἐπὶ νουθεσίᾳ δὲ τὴν κόλασιν ἔλαβεν, ἀλλʼ ἐπʼ αὐξήσει τῆς κακίας, ἡδονὴν μὲν πᾶσαν ἐκπορίζων αὐτοῦ τῷ σώματι, κἂν μεθʼ ὕβρεως τῶν συνόντων δέῃ ταύτην ἔχειν·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 11.1c. AD 96

Διὰ φιλοξενίαν καὶ εὐσέβειαν Λὼτ ἐσώθη ἐκ Σοδόμων, τῆς περιχώρου πάσης κριθείσης διὰ πυρὸς καὶ θείου, πρόδηλον ποιήσας ὁ δεσπότης, ὅτι τοὺς ἐλπίζοντας ἐπ’ αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐγκαταλείπει, τοὺς δὲ ἑτεροκλινεῖς ὑπάρχοντας εἰς κόλασιν καὶ αἰκισμὸν τίθησιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

1st c. BC 2nd c. AD

P.Yale 1 57Herakleopolites94 BC–71 BC

κατεγνωσμένοι ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ δέοντος καὶ ὡς ποιήσω φανερὸν διειλήφασιν ἐκφεύξεσθαι τὴν περὶ τούτων κόλασιν. ὅθεν δέομαί σου πέμψαι τὴν ἔντευξιν ἐπὶ Λυσανίαν τὸν συγγενῆ καὶ πρὸς ταῖς ἀνακρίσεσι

BGU 8 1764Herakleopolites65 BC–45 BC

καὶ διαστάσεσιν ἐθνικαῖς ὄντας, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡμᾶς αἰτιᾶσθαι ὡς τροφὴν παρασχομένους ἀνθρώποις, οἷς κόλασιν ἔδει μηχανᾶσθαι πρὸς τὸ τὸν Ἡρακλεοπολίτην εὐσταθεῖν, τῆς ἐσχάτης μισοπονηρίας ἐστὶν ἄξιον. τοῦ δὲ

P.Coll.Youtie 1 30AD 198–AD 199

εἰ μάθοι αὖ τοιούτων τινῶν ἐν τοῖς ὑφʼ ὑμᾶς νομοῖς περιορωμένων ἀλλὰ τὴν ἴσην κόλασιν τοῖς σκεπομένοις ὑποστήσεσθε. ἐκείνων μὲν γὰρ ἕκαστος, εἰ καὶ τὰ παρὰ τὰ ἀπειρημένα τολμᾷ,

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἔχει·echō has; G2192 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular ¶

709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.

Amplified meaning

has, includes

Tyndale gloss

to have/be

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

29%having

having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

ὁArticle the

ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,

μήNeg

ὁArticle theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep

ὅς

καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist

χρείαneed, necessity, bus

οὐNegαὐτόςὅς

ἔχωhas;709×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegὅς

ἐν

ὁArticle theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me

οὖςthe ear

ἀκούωI hear, listen

ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we

ὁArticle theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament

Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἐξουσίαpower, authority, weight×ζωήlife×ἑπτάIndec×οὖςthe ear×αἰώνιοςeternal, unending×κακῶςbadly, evilly×κεφαλήthe head×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ὁho the [one] G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe [one]19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

δὲde now G1161 Conjunction ¶

2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in 1 John than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.

Tyndale gloss

then

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

33%now

now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand

εἰCond

παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist

εἰμίI am, exist

περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche

οὗτος

δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t

δέnow2787×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

αὐτός

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn

τὶς

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

φοβούμενοςphobeō fearing G5399 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

95× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To fear means to be alarmed or in awe of something, like God's power. In the New Testament, it often means to reverence or respect, as in Matthew 10:31.

Amplified meaning

is afraid, has dread

Tyndale gloss

to fear

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φοβέω is derived from φόβος and primarily means to frighten or to be alarmed. It covers a range of meanings from being terrified to having reverential fear, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 10:31 and Luke 1:50. The word is used in both active and passive forms, but in the New Testament, it appears only in the passive sense.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φοβέω, ῶ

(< φόβος)

[in LXX chiefly for ירא ;]

in Hom., to put to flight. Pass., to be put to flight, to flee affrighted

to terrify, frighten (Wis 179; Hdt. and Att..). Pass. (so always in NT; cf. M, Pr., 162), to be seized with fear, be affrighted, fear: Mt 10:31 14:27, Mk 5:33 6:50, Lk 1:13 8:50, Jo 6:19 12:15, Ac 16:38, al.; opp. to ὑψηλοφρονεῖν, Ro 11:20; σφόδρα, Mt 17:6 27:54; c. cogn. acc., φόβον μέγαν, Mk 4:41, Lk 2:9 (I Mac 10:8); φόβον αὐτῶν…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φοβέομαι (act. obsolete): (1) ‘‘fear,’”’ ‘‘dread,’’ (a) absol., P Lips I. 40% (iv/y A.D.) κἀγὼ αὐτὸς φοβοῦμαι, ἐπειδὴ ἀπών ἐστιν ὁ ἑταῖρός μου, OG/S 6659 (i/A.D.) ὅσοι μὲν γὰρ ἐφοβήθησαν ἀκούσαντες περὶ... ; (b) ς. acc., P Oxy II. 237-1 (ap. 186) φοβηθέντας τὸν κίνδυνον, “through fear of the danger’’ (Edd.), P Flor III. 33232 (ii/a.p.) οὔτε προσεκύνησα θεοὺς φοβουμένη σου Td μετέωρον, P Grenf II, 84% (v/vi A.D.) τοὺς νόμους φοβηθεὶς ἔφυγεν εἰς ἐρημίαν (said of a patricide) ; (c) c. μή and conj., P Magd 9® (ili/B.C.) φοβουμένη μὴ συμπέσηι (of a sanctuary in a dangerous state), BGU IV. 10974 (time of Claudius or Nero) (= Olsson, p. 113) φοβοῦμαι yap μὴ σχάσῃ. velv]αυσίακε [γ]άρ, ‘for I am afraid that he will give up, for he has become sick,’’ P Tebt II. 31818 (a.p. 166) φο[βουἹμένη δ[ὲ] μὴ λάθω [κατὰ] τὸ εἴς pe δίκαι[ον] οἰκονομεί[ας, ‘tas I am afraid that my right of procedure may escape…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φοβέω (phobeō) — to fear.

φοβέω,

3rd.pers. plural imperative φοβεόντων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect imperfect φοβέεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐφόβησα [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive and middle, Ionic dialect [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect imperative φοβεῦ or φοβέο, [Refs]: Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural imperfect φοβέοντο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future φοβήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist passive ἐφοβήθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; aorist middle ἐφοβησάμην only [Refs]: perfect πεφόβημαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: pluperfect 3rd.pers. plural ἐπεφόβηντο [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect πεφοβήατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A active, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always in the sense put to flight, [ἴρηξ] ἐφόβησε κολοιούς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] καὶ ἄλκιμον ἄνδρα φοβεῖ[Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φοβέω

phobeo

from 5401; to frighten, i.e. (passively) to be alarmed; by analogy, to

be in awe of, i.e. revere:--be (+ sore) afraid, fear (exceedingly),

reverence.

see GREEK for 5401

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φοβέομαι

v.

I fear, am terrified

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φοβέομαι phobeomai 95x

has an active form, φοβέω (G5828), but only occurs as a passive (deponent) in our literature, to fear, dread, Mt. 10:26; 14:5; to fear reverentially, to reverence, Mk. 6:20; Lk. 1:50; Acts 10:2; Eph. 5:33; Rev. 11:18; to be afraid to do a thing, Mt. 2:22; Mk. 9:32; to be reluctant, to scruple, Mt. 1:20; to fear, be apprehensive, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φοβέω φόβος Act. to put to flight, Lat. fugo, Il.

to strike with fear, to terrify, frighten, alarm, Lat. terreo, Hdt., attic; πόνος ὁ μὴ φοβῶν free from alarm, Soph.; φοβήσαντες κατεστήσαντο τὴν πολιτείαν they established it by terror, Plat.

Pass. and Mid. to be put to flight, to flee affrighted, flee, Hom.; φοβηθείς in flight, Il.; ὑπό τινος φοβέεσθαι to flee before him, id. Il.

to be seized with fear, be affrighted, fear, Hdt., attic; φοβεῖσθαι εἴς or πρός τι to be alarmed at a thing, Soph.; ἀμφί τινι to fear about a thing, Hdt.; περί τινος Xen.; περί τινι Thuc., etc.:— φοβεῖσθαι μὴ . . to fear lest a thing will be, Lat. vereri ne . . , Eur., etc.; so, φ. ὅπως μὴ . . Thuc.; so, φοβ. ὅτι . . , ὡς . . to fear that . . , not like Lat. vereri ut . . , id. Thuc., etc.:— φοβ. c. inf. to fear to do, be afraid…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PNP-NSM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

26%do fear

do fear26% · 25×fearing15% · 14×they were afraid8% · 8×they feared6% · 6×do be afraid5% · 5×they were afraid of3% · 3×i fear3% · 3×he was afraid3% · 3×other renderings29% · 28×

95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 31 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb98%adverbial2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 95 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

μήNeg

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existαὐτός

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςλεγιώνa legion, very lῥῆμαa thing spoken

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,γενεάa generationἔθνοςa race, people,

οὐNeg

θεόςGod, a godκαίand, even, also,βοηθόςa helper

ἩρῴδηςHerod

αὐτόςγάρfor

φοβέωfearing95×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὄχλοςa crowdθεόςGod, a godἸωάννηςJohn

αὐτός

οὐδείςno one, none, noἐπερωτάωI interrogate, qμήNeg

γάρfor

ὁArticle theαὐτόςσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

δοξάζωI glorify, honorἄρχωI beginτρέμωI tremble, am af

δέbut, on the other ha

μᾶλλονmore, ratherθαυμάζωI wonder, admireἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφοβέω · 95× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts Mark Revelation John Hebrews 1 Peter Romans 2 Corinthians Galatians 1 John

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μήNeg×ὄχλοςa crowd×πῶς×ἀποκτείνωI put to death, kill×φόβοςfear, terror, reverence×ἄγγελοςan angel, messenger×λαόςa people, the crowd×παραλαμβάνωI take, receive×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יָרֵאfear66%H3372 · 126 verses

Counted over the 189 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 142c. AD 40

ἦν γὰρ οἶκος αὐτῷ καὶ πόλις ὁ κόσμος, μηδεμιᾶς χειροποιήτου κατασκευῆς δεδημιουργημένης ἐκ λίθων καὶ ξύλων ὕλης, ᾧ καθάπερ ἐν πατρίδι μετὰ πάσης ἀσφαλείας ἐνδιῃτᾶτο φόβου μὲν ἐκτὸς ὤν, ἅτε τῆς τῶν περιγείων ἡγεμονίας ἀξιωθεὶς καὶ πάντων ὅσα θνητὰ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.96c. AD 75–95

Νῶχος δὲ φοβούμενος, μὴ καθʼ ἕκαστον ἔτος ἐπικλύζῃ τὴν γῆν ὁ θεὸς φθορὰν ἀνθρώπων καταψηφισάμενος, ἱερὰ καύσας ἐδεῖτο τὸν θεὸν τοῦ λοιποῦ ἐπὶ τῆς πρώτης μένειν εὐταξίας καὶ μηδὲν ἔτι τοιοῦτον ἐπενεγκεῖν πάθος, ὑφʼ οὗ κινδυνεύσει πᾶν ἀπολέσθαι τὸ τῶν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.10c. AD 100

λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 7th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Worp 16AD 11

σιος Δωριεὺς Φλελεμούθι πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ ὑγιαίνειν. μὴ φοβοῦ περὶ τῶν σκευῶν ὧν ἔχεις ἀλλὰ ἀσφάλισαι, ἂν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ μεταλλάρχης ἔλθῃ ἐρωτῶν‧

P.Tebt. 2 335Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 165

καλ … ν τὴν … τελείαν ἀπόφασιν εἰς τὴν ἐξέτασιν τῶν βιβλίων Ἑρμαίσκου φοβούμενος μὴ ἄρα εὑρεθείη ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐπίληψις ἕνεκα τῆς τοῦ ἐποικίου οἰκειότητος πρὸς τὸν Ἑρμαίσκον.

C.Clergé 4 172Narmuthis (Arsinoites)AD 190

παρόντος δὲ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ μετεπέμψατο τὸν πατέρα μου καὶ ἐπερώτησεν ὅτι ποῦ ἐστιν. καὶ φοβούμενος μὴ ἐντυχῶ κατὰ αὐτοῦ τῷ ἡγεμόνι ὑπεμνηματίσατο οὕτως β … ἔτους Φαμενὼτ ϛ ἀπαιτῶν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

οὐou not G3756 Particle · negative ¶

1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.

Tyndale gloss

no

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as mē), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

82%not

not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός

ὅς

ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe

ὅτιthat, since, because

σύαὐτόςἐγώ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς

οὐnot1622×

what comes after →

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐκὁArticle theἐγώ

μήNeg

παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe

οἶδαI know, remember

ὅτιthat, since, becὁArticle theτίςIrg

γάρfor

εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deὁArticle the

δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab

ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament

John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶδαI know, remember×δύναμαιI am powerful, am able×οὐδέNeg×μόνοςalone, but, only×χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted, lawful, possible×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 17137 BC

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

τετελείωταιteleioō has been perfected G5048 Verb · perfect · passive · indicative · third person · singular ¶

23× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To perfect something means to complete or finish it, making it whole. In John 4:34, Jesus says his food is to finish God's work, and in Hebrews 7:19, it's about making people perfect through faith.

Amplified meaning

made complete, matured

Tyndale gloss

to perfect

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τελειόω is built from the root meaning 'perfect' or 'complete.' It covers a range of meanings including to finish, accomplish, or bring to maturity, applicable to both tasks and personal development. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as fulfilling a mission (John 4:34) and achieving spiritual completeness (Hebrews 2:10). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τελειόω, -ῶ

(< τέλειος),

[in LXX: Ex 29:9, Le 4:5, al. (τ. χεῖρας, מָלֵא pi.), II Ki 22:26, al. (תָּמַם), Wi 4:13, al. (cf. Westc., He., 64) ;]

bring to an end, finish, accomplish, fulfil: Jo 4:34, Ac 20:24; of time, Lk 2:43, Jo 5:36 17:4; pass., ἡ γραφή, Jo 19:28.

to bring to maturity or completeness, to complete, perfect;

of things: He 7:19, Ja 2:22, I Jo 2:5 4:12, 17 :

of persons, in ethical and spiritual sense: He 2:10 9:9 10:1, 14; pass., Lk 13:32, Jo 17:23, Phl 3:12, He 5:9 7:28 11:40 12:23, I Jo 4:18 (for a different view of…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τελειόω (in prof. auth. also τελεόω, which Hat. uses everywhere [and which is “the prevailing form in Attic prose” (L. and S.)]; other writ. use both forms indifferently), τῶ: 1 aor. ἐτελείωσα ; pf.reredei@xa; Pass. (or Mid.), pres. τελειοῦμαι; pf. τετελείωμαι ; 1 aor. ἐτελειώθην; (τέλειος); fr. Hdt., Soph., Thue., and Plat. down; equiv. to τέλειον ποιῶ, to make perfect or complete ; 1. to carry through completely; to accomplish, finish, bring to an end: τὸν δρόμον, Acts xx. 243; τὸ ἔργον, Jn. iv. 34; v. 36; xvii. 4, (Neh. vi. 16; τὸν οἶκον, 2 Chr. viii. 16); τὰς ἡμέρας, Lk. ii. 43; mid. [pres. ef. B. 38 (33) ] τελειοῦμαι, I finish, complete, what was given me to do, Lk. xiii. 32 [some (so A. V.) take it here as pass., 7 am perfected (understanding it of his death; ef. Bilicott, Life of our Lord, Lect. vi. p. 242 n.1; Keim ii. 615 n.1)]. 2. to complete (perfect), i.e. add what is yet…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τελειόω is common in legal papyri = “ execute”: see e.g. P Oxy TIT. 483°° (A.D. 108) τελειῶσαι τὸν χρημα[τισμὸν] ὡς καθήκει, ‘to execute the deed in the proper way” (Edd.), and P Giss I. 34% (A.D. 265-6) éredel[woe]y τὰ νόμιμα. In P Oxy IT. 2389 (A.D. 72) it seems rather to have the meaning “complete” by the insertion of date and signatures— προσέρχεσθαι τοῖς ἀγορανόμοις καὶ τε[λειοῦν] ταύτας (sc. οἰκονομίας) ἐντὸς [.... : see the editors’ note. On the use of the verb in connexion with martyrdom, as in 4 Mace γ1" ὃν πιστὴ θανάτου σφραγὶς ἐτελείωσεν, see Moffatt Hed. p. 32, and cf. the Christian gravestone Prezsigke 1600% ἔνθα κατά[κει]ται ἡ papla IT.[.]O@la, ἐτελεώθη μη(νὶ) Θὼθ κα. MGr τελειώνω…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τελειόω (teleioō) — to perfect.

τελει-όω

and τελεόω (the latter always in [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— make perfect, complete:

I. of things, acts, works, time, make perfect, complete, accomplish, πάντα ἐτελέωσε ποιήσας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τελεώσαντες τὰς σπονδάς having completed the libations, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. βίου ἐνιαυτούς complete the tale of years, [Refs]; τὸ ἔργον [NT+2nd c.AD+]:—middle, [Refs 4th c.AD+]:—passive, to be accomplished, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τελεωθέντων ἀμφοτέροισι when both men had their wishes accomplished, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. b execute a legal instrument, make it valid by completing it, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

I.2. in Logic, τ. τὸ εἶδος complete, make perfect the form or species, [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, of syllogisms, to be made perfect (by reduction to the…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

τελειόω

teleioo

from 5046; to complete, i.e. (literally) accomplish, or (figuratively)

consummate (in character):--consecrate, finish, fulfil, make) perfect.

see GREEK for 5046

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τελειόω

v.

I complete, accomplish, make perfect

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τελειόω teleioō 23x

to execute fully, discharge, Jn. 4:34; 5:36; 17:4; to reach the end of, run through, finish, Lk. 2:43; Acts 20:24; to consummate, place in a condition of finality, Heb. 7:19; to perfect a person, advance a person to final completeness of character, Heb. 2:10; 5:9; 7:28; to perfect a person, advance a person to a completeness of its kind, which needs no further provision, Heb. 9:9; 10:1, 14; pass. to receive fulfillment, Jn. 19:28; to be brought to the goal, to reach the end of one’s…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τελειόω to make perfect, complete:

of things, to make it perfect, complete, accomplish, Hdt., Thuc., etc.:—Pass. to be accomplished, Hdt., Soph.; τελεωθέντων ἀμφοτέροισι when both parties had their wishes accomplished, Hdt.:— of prophecies, to be fulfilled, NTest.

of persons, to bring one to perfection, Hdt.; τελειῶσαι λόχον to make the ambush successful, Soph.:—Pass. to attain perfection, come to the end of one's labours, id. Soph.: to reach maturity, Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-RPI-3S — Verb · perfect · passive · indicative · third person · singular
perfect passive indicative — a past action whose result still stands.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

22%perfected

perfected22% · 5×has been perfected13% · 3×make perfect9% · 2×finish4% · 1×have been perfected4% · 1×having been perfected4% · 1×perfect4% · 1×he has perfected4% · 1×other renderings35% · 8×

23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb91%adverbial9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώ

ἵναin order that, so th

πατήρfather, Father, τελέωI end, accomplis

τρίτος& Adv

ὁArticle the

ἔργονwork, labor, action,

ὁArticle the

εἰμίI am, exist

ἵναin order that, s

τελειόωhas been perfected23×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἡμέραa dayγραφήa writing, passaδρόμοςa running, cours

ἐν

οὗτοςἐγώὁArticle the

αὐτός

ὁArticle theαὐτός

εἰς

εἷςoneὁArticle the

ὅς

δίδωμιI offer, give

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτελειόω · 23× in the New Testament

Hebrews John 1 John Luke Acts James Philippians

Across the New Testament7 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἵναin order that, so that×ἀγάπηlove×ἔργονwork, labor, action, deed×εἷςone×δύναμαιI am powerful, am able×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יָדhand66%H3027 · 8 verses מָלֵאbe full, fill66%H4390 · 8 verses אַהֲרֹןAaron, elder brother of Moses33%H175 · 4 verses כֹּהֵןpriest33%H3548 · 4 verses

Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Didache

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 89c. AD 40

Ἐπεὶ δ’ ὁ σύμπας κόσμος ἐτελειώθη κατὰ τὴν ἑξάδος ἀριθμοῦ τελείου φύσιν, τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν ἑβδόμην ἐσέμνυνεν ὁ πατὴρ ἐπαινέσας καὶ ἁγίαν προσειπών·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.31c. AD 75–95

Τῆς δὲ πόλεως εἰ καί τι παρέλθοι τὸ πῦρ κατέσκαπτε καὶ κατὰ τῶν οἰκησόντων, εἴ τις πορθηθεῖσαν ἀνεγείρειν ἐθελήσειεν, ἀρὰς ἔθετο, ὅπως θεμελίους μὲν τειχῶν βαλόμενος στερηθῇ τοῦ πρώτου παιδός, τελειώσας δὲ τὸν νεώτατον τῶν παίδων ἀποβάλῃ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 14.5c. AD 100

ἵνα κἀκεῖνοι τελειωθῶσιν τοῖς ἁμαρτήμασιν, καὶ ἡμεῖς διὰ τοῦ κληρονομοῦντος διαθήκην κυρίου Ἰησοῦ λάβωμεν, ὃς εἰς τοῦτο ἡτοιμάσθη, ἵνα αὐτὸς φανείς, τὰς ἤδη δεδαπανημένας ἡμῶν καρδίας τῷ θανάτῳ καὶ παραδεδομένας τῇ τῆς πλάνης ἀνομίᾳ λυτρωσάμενος ἐκ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD

P.Lond. 2 p. 203-204 no. 142Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 95

χιλίας διακοσίας τεσσαράκοντα καὶ τοὺς τούτων τόκους ἃ ὤφειλεν αὐτῶι ὁ Μίκκαλος κατὰ δάνειον τετελειώμενον διὰ τοῦ ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ γραφείου τῶι τρεισκαιδεκάτωι ἔτει Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Φαρμοῦθι

P.Fam.Tebt. 19ArsinoitesAD 118

καὶ τοὺς ὑπομνηματισμοὺς τοὺς κατʼ αὐτῶν πάλιν καρπίζεσθαι τὰ ὑπάρχοντα, καθʼ ὧν τὰ νόμιμα ἐτελειώθη. Ἰσιδώρα καὶ Οὐήρου ῥήτορος ἀποκριναμένου· εἰ λάβοι συνπεριφοράν, πληρώσειν αὐτὸν τοῖς ὀφειλομένοις, ἄλλας μέντοι

P.Mil.Vogl. 6 264Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 127

ἀπολειφθέντων ἐν τόποις τισίν, ὧν τὴν κλεῖν παρεθέμεθα τῷ ἀλλήλων θείῳ Παυλείνῳ ἄχρι ἂν τελειώσω καὶ ἡ καταδιαίρεσις πάντων τῶν ἀπολειφθέντων ἐξ ἡμισείας γενήσεται· ἐπεὶ οὖν ἡ Θαυβαροῦς ἀγνωμονοῦσα

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἐνen in G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνin2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

τῇho <the> G3588 Article · dative · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“Fear no there is in <the> love, but <the> perfect love out casts <the> fear, because the fear punishment has; the [one] now fearing not has been perfected in <the> love.”

ἀγάπῃ.agapē love. G26 Noun · dative · singular · feminine ¶

116× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Unconditional love or affection, like the love God shows to humanity in John 3:16. It's also used to describe love between people, like in John 13:35.

Amplified meaning

God's unconditional love

Tyndale gloss

love

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀγάπη (i.e., *agape*) means love, particularly the spiritual love between God and humanity, as well as among individuals. It is often associated with goodwill and esteem, distinguishing it from other forms of love like friendship or romantic love. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in the context of Christian teachings on love, such as in John 13:35 and Romans 5:8. The plural form refers to communal love feasts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† ἀγάπη, -ης, ἡ

[in LXX for אַהֲבָה, which is also rendered by ἀγάπησις and φιλία;]

love, goodwill, esteem. Outside of bibl. and eccl. books, there is no clear instance (with Deiss., LAE, 18:4, 70:2, cf. the same writer in Constr. Quar., ii, 4; and with MM, VGT, s.v., cf. Dr. Moulton in Exp. Times, xxvi, 3, 139). In NT, like ἀγαπάω, -ῶ,

Of men's love:

to one another, Jo 13:35;

to God, I Jo 2:5.

Of divine love;

God's love: to men, Ro 5:8; to Christ, Jo 17:26;

Christ's love to men: Ro 8:35.

In pl., love feasts: Ju 12 (DB, iii, 157).

SYN.: φιλία. ἀ., signifying properly (v.s. ἀγαπάω) love which chooses its object, is taken over from LXX, where its connotation is more general, into NT, and there used exclusively to express that spiritual bond of love…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀγάπη, -ἧς, ἡ, ἃ purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyttenbach, following Reiske’s conjecture, long ago restored ἀγαπήσων in place of ἀγάπης, ὧν in Plut. sympos. quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof. auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used ἀγάπησις. “The Sept. use ἀγάπη for 138, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8; vii. 6; viii. 4,6, 7; [It is noticeable that the word first makes its appearance as a current term in the Song of Sol.;—certainly no undesigned evidence respecting the idea which the Alex. translators had of the love in this Song” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1,6; [2 S. xiii. 15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas.; it occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and Rey., but frequently in the…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀγαπη use in connexion with Ptolemy on the Rosetta stone, OG/S got (B.C. 196) ἠγαπημένου ὑπὸ τοῦ POa. Cf. a Munich papyrus in Chrest. I. 1091" (end of iii/B.c.), where Wilcken restores [Πτολεμαῖ]ος αἰωνόβιος ἠγα[πημένος ὑπὸ τῆς Ισιδος]. It may be noted that in Mk 10% Field (Λίοζες, Pp. 34) suggests the translation ‘‘caressed” for ἠγάπησεν, comparing Plut. Peric/. 1: ξένους τινὰς ἐν ἹΡώμῃ πλουσίους, κυνῶν τέκνα καὶ πιθήκων ἐν τοῖς κόλποις περιφέροντας καὶ ἀγαπῶντας (fondling) ἰδὼν ὁ Καῖσαρ. .. ἠρώτησεν εἰ παιδία παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς οὐ τίκτουσιν αἱ γυναῖκες. Β. L. Gildersleeve (Justin Martyr, p. 135) suggests that ‘the larger use of [ἀγαπᾶν] in Christian writers is perhaps due to an avoidance of φιλεῖν in the sense of ‘kissing.”” He says Xenophon made the two words absolute synonyms, comparing MZemorahsilia ii. 7. 9 with 12; while he deprecates refinements in Jn 2111", since ‘the Evangelist…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀγάπη (agapē) — love.

ἀγάπ-η, ἡ,

love, [LXX+2nd c.BC+] O; of the love of husband and wife, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. especially love of God for man and of man for God, [LXX+1st c.AD+]:—also brotherly love, charity, [NT]

II. in plural, love-feast, [NT]

III. alms, charity, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

IV. ἀγάπη θεῶν, title of Isis, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀγάπη

agape

from 25; love, i.e. affection or benevolence; specially (plural) a

love-feast:--(feast of) charity(-ably), dear, love.

see GREEK for 25

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀγάπη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

love

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγάπη agapē 116x

love, generosity, kindly concern, devotedness; pl. love-feasts, Jude 12

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀγάπη Deriv. uncertain. love: esp. brotherly love, charity; the love of God for man and of man for God, NTest.

in pl. a love-feast, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

luv ('ahebh, 'ahabhah, noun; phileo, agapao, verb; agape, noun): Love to both God and man is fundamental to true religion, whether as expressed in the Old Testament or the New Testament. Jesus Himself declared that all the law and the prophets hang upon love (Mt 22:40; Mr 12:28-34). Paul, in his matchless ode on love (1Co 13), makes it the greatest of the graces of the Christian life--greater than speaking with tongues, or the gift of prophecy, or the possession of a faith of superior excellence; for without love all these gifts and graces, desirable and useful as they are in themselves, are as nothing, certainly of no permanent value in the sight of God. Not that either Jesus or Paul underestimates the faith from which all the graces proceed, for this grace is recognized as…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Love

This word seems to require explanation only in the case of its use by our Lord in his interview with “Simon, the son of Jonas,” after his resurrection (John 21:16, 17). When our Lord says, “Lovest thou me?” he uses the Greek word agapas; and when Simon answers, he uses the Greek word philo, i.e., “I love.” This is the usage in the first and second questions put by our Lord; but in the third our Lord uses Simon’s word. The distinction between these two Greek words is thus fitly described by Trench:, ”Agapan has more of judgment and deliberate choice; philein has more of attachment and peculiar personal affection. Thus the ‘Lovest thou’ (Gr. agapas) on the lips of the Lord seems to Peter at this moment too cold a word, as though his Lord were keeping him at a distance, or at least not inviting him to draw near, as in the…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

GOD IS LOVE; AND HE THAT DWELLETH IN LOVE DWELLETH IN GOD, AND GOD IN HIM, 1Jo 4:16. Love is a chief attribute of Jehovah, the length and breadth and height and depth of which are beyond comprehension, for they are infinite, Eph 3:18,19. Between the three Persons of the Godhead, love is unutterable full, perfect, and blissful; towards holy angels and Christians, God’s love is an infinite fatherly complacency and affection; towards sinners, it is immeasurable compassion. It is shown in all his works and ways, and dictated his holy law, but is most signally displayed in the gospel, Joh 3:16. "Herein is love."

Holy love in man would make the whole heart and soul supremely delight in and obey God, and cordially and practically love all beings according to their character-the good…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ OF CHILDREN FOR PARENTS

See CHILDREN

→ OF GOD, LOVE OF

→ OF MAN FOR GOD Ex 20:6; De 5:10; 6:5; 7:9; 10:12; 11:1,13,22; 13:3; 30:6,16,20; Jos 22:5; 23:11; Ps 18:1; 31:23; 37:4; 45:10,11; 63:5,6; 69:35,36; 73:25,26; 91:14; 97:10; 116:1; 145:20; Pr 8:17; 23:26; Isa 56:6,7; Jer 2:2,3; Mt 22:37,38; Mr 12:29,30,32,33; Lu 11:42;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

98%love

love98% · 112×other renderings2% · 2×

114 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial35%subject29%object29%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 116 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἐνὅτιthat, since, bec

ἐν

σύἑαυτοῦἤDisj

καίand, even, also, nam

πίστιςfaith, belief, tἀδελφόςa brotherδύναμιςmight, power, ma

ἀγάπηlove.116×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godΧριστόςanointed, the Meἐν

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of εἰς

σύ

καίand, even, also,ἔτιstill, yet, evenὅτιthat, since, bec

ὅς

ἔχωI have, hold, poἀγαπάωI loveεἰμίI am, exist

δέbut, on the other ha

μήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀγάπη · 116× in the New Testament

1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians Romans John 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy Colossians 2 Timothy Philippians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×ἀλλήλων×μένωI remain, abide×εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind×ὑπομονήendurance, steadfastness×τελειόωI complete, accomplish, make perfect×περιπατέωI walk, conduct my life×ζηλόωI am jealous, eager for×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Polycarp

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Unchangeableness of God 69c. AD 40

παρό μοι δοκεῖ τοῖς προειρημένοις δυσὶ κεφαλαίοις, τῷ τε „ὡς ἄνθρωπος“ καὶ τῷ „οὐχ ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὁ θεὸς“ ἕτερα δύο συνυφῆναι ἀκόλουθα καὶ συγγενῆ, φόβον τε καὶ ἀγάπην·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 21.7c. AD 96

τὸ ἀξιαγάπητον τῆς ἁγνείας ἦθος ἐνδειξάσθωσαν, τὸ ἀκέραιον τῆς πραΰτητος αὐτῶν βούλημα ἀποδειξάτωσαν, τὸ ἐπιεικὲς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτῶν διὰ τῆς σιγῆς φανερὸν ποιησάτωσαν, τὴν ἀγάπην αὐτῶν μὴ κατὰ προσκλίσεις, ἀλλὰ πᾶσιν τοῖς φοβουμένοις τὸν θεὸν ὁσίως…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

4th c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Got. 11AD 201–AD 325

πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἐν κυρίῳ βοηθεῖν, καὶ ταύταις ἀγομέναις πρὸς τὸν ἐπίτροπον ἐπιδώσεις τὴν ἀγάπην σου, διʼ ὧν ἐὰν παράσχῃ αὐταῖς. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι ἐν κυρίῳ.

Vigiliae Christianae 79 (2025), p. 201-210AD 301–AD 350

ἐν Διὸς Πόλει, ἵνα οὖν μαρτυρήσῃ ἡμῖν τὰ τῆς ἐν θεῷ σου ἀγάπης. προσαγόρευε ἐν κυρίῳ τὴν ποθεινοτάτην ἡμῶν θυγατέρα Μαρκιανὴν μετὰ καὶ ὅλων τῶν ἐν τῷ

P.Lond. 6 1914Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 335

ὅτι ἡμάρτησα καὶ ἐπαρῳνήθην ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ὅτι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς ὕβρισα. ἐποίησεν δὲ καὶ ἀγάπην ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ᾑμέρᾳ Ἑλλην ὢν διὰ τὸ ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐποίησεν.

BSB	There is no fear in love, but perfect love drives out fear, because fear involves punishment. The one who fears has not been perfected in love.
KJV	There is no fear in love; but perfect love casteth out fear: because fear hath torment. He that feareth is not made perfect in love.
ASV	There is no fear in love: but perfect love casteth out fear, because fear hath punishment; and he that feareth is not made perfect in love.
YLT	fear is not in the love, but the perfect love doth cast out the fear, because the fear hath punishment, and he who is fearing hath not been made perfect in the love;
WEB	There is no fear in love; but perfect love casts out fear, because fear has punishment. He who fears is not made perfect in love.
BBE	There is no fear in love: true love has no room for fear, because where fear is, there is pain; and he who is not free from fear is not complete in love.

1 John 4:18 — Word Study

Cite / Share This Page

Deep Study — 1 John 4:18

Context — The Assurance of Lovegenerated

Cross References

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 10 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

Nave’s Topical Bible — the subjects this verse is filed under

The Key Word — τελειόω, teleioōgenerated

How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

Sentence Structuregenerated

Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Reflection Questionsgenerated

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Modern formal

Tyndale line

Strictly literal

From the Latin

Simplified

Word by word, the decisions they made

The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Word by word, across the editions

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

Lexicons — every word in 1 John 4:18

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before